The Executive Work Station
A high performance 4-part business package
MABAUWEA: A comprehensive
telephone and personal appointment
manager that speed dials your phone,
tracks telephone costs and billing,
prints: reports and memos and keeps
your personal calendar, on both a daily
and monthly basis.
in -) 4 =: The first fully inte-
grated word processor, spreadsheet
and data base manager for the Apple ///.
Combines the power of the three most
commonly used program types with the
mene to easily transfer data among
them.
Provides the
ability to quickly analyze and present
data graphically including sophisticated
statistical and mathematical tech-
niques.
1 3
— mt
La,
- =
a
— 7 - ite
wr, © i
| )
a a .
dll
———
~
a od
a pai
| ia
TS Bes
e
a “aE I
i
aa = Ce
:
——_
Integrated spread sheet, word processing
and data base for Apple /// Computers
aa re Sess
Sica eee eae
Ce Be ae a
be an Oe ae :
st a | meee
Pr
cg
ee ae re
“6 Pattie tts iy tig PO FAR Phas, 7?
Sayan: a ee
Hatt + a vei ue oe it
% i i) See ai
Sage rrr
, Left)
Bees
foes in F% a
5g)
—— =_=_ ee ee ee ee CC
ia)
SE -—
= a ie
2 Gf Me By ce A ee
a ———
Si EE ——————
— ——
‘
eZ
am Fb
on
Be lei
NOTICE
Haba Systems, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in the product this
manual describes at any time without notice.
DISCLAIMER OF ALL
WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES
Haba Systems, Inc. makes no warranties, either express or implied, with
respect to this manual or to the product described in this manual, its quality,
performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular purpose. The
software is sold or licensed “as is”. The entire risk as to quality and perfor-
mance is with buyer—and not with Haba Systems, Inc., its distributor, or its
retailer—who assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or
correction and any incidental or inconsequential damages. In no event will
Haba Systems, Inc. be liable for direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential
damages resulting from any defect in the product, even if Haba Systems,
Inc. has not advised of the possibility of such damages. Some states do not
allow the exclusion or limitations of implied warranties or liability for incid-
ental or consequential damages, so the above, limitation or exclusion may
not apply to you.
This manual is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not,
in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or
reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without con-
sent, in writing, from Haba Systems, Inc.
SOS is acopyrighted program of Apple Computer, Inc. licensed to Rupert Lissner to distribute
for use only in combination with /// E-Z Pieces. Apple Software shall not be copied onto
another diskette (except for archive purposes) or into memory unless as part of the execution
of /// E-Z Pieces. When ///E-Z Pieces has completed execution Apple Software shall not be
used by any other program.
t
mnmommmm Mm
az
amJ
///E-Z Pieces
Developed by Rupert Lissner
© Copyright 1983 by Haba Systems, Inc.
///€-Z Pieces is a trademark of Haba Systems, Inc.
Apple is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Habanet is a trademark of Haba Systems, Inc.
DIF is a trademark of Software Arts, Inc.
Catalyst is a trademark of Quark Incorporated
ProFile is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Quick File is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
VisiCalc is a registered trademark of VisiCorp
Tim 2
4
-— =U
a a)
Ss ma
i= Ss
- = |
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1—Understanding / / / E-Z Pieces
What (s/f E-Z2 PIOCOS? 6 osc ses ecas ceo eee nee aw Hews awe awe Cas Coa CR 1-1
Equioment YOu NESS sc ces cap 6.cGh ewe 2o5 855 Fee eee ew ee eS eee 1-1
How eee 77 7 EZ. Pints WIE oie oe hee bho aw Rk oe eee 1-2
PA PF EAE Pe PI a tare dla Sai hee a ee Reick ee 1-4
RI i ak anata leh ig ae achalasia 1-4
General Guidelines for /// E-Z Pieces Files ..................000. 1-6
File. LOGAUONS «case cas ons 004 7559 4Ns woven Hen GET ERE RwR ees ER ees 1-7
Standard and Current Locations ss ces-ccx ces wee sce eae ose cea eon 1-7
Files by Filename or Grouped by Pathname .................... 1-7
FeSO IFES EI tetracaine ga A ee ie a AR oi 1-8
Chapter 2—Working With / / / E-Z Pieces
Searel Te Lile 77 Eee PICS a0 ch 00k 505.9R5 das 185 0.69 erate ee 2-2
Communicating With://7-E-Z PIOCES: « +5008 cad e909 neh wats worms wacen 2-2
USING CODBN-ANDIS COMMANGS ws scx ats cee ern erg wae nnd oie Ne dws 2-3
ReESpOndING 10 PLOMDls ocicccidiiis ves wee cme sw cere mes oN ee ER 2-3
SelIecind & Mend Opuon ssicais cos ces con sew aes cow ore cannes eens 2-3
Selecting an Answer to a QueStiONn .......... cece eee ev eeeeeee 2-4
Cnoosing Files Front LG ..54.008-c09 cee dceaeed ee as coe Be Ss 2-5
Answering Questions by Typing Information ............eeee eee 2-6
Typing and Editing Information: General Guidelines............... 2-6
Using /77 E-2: Pieces’ TWO: GUISOIS 6.6.00 ves mem wees sae Kare He OURS 2-6
Deleting INOUNBEON s5 cs .c95 cee ene eeu cxe 18s weer RS Vee REEE CON 2-7
LSS “ESS 4. cas vse cee be 2G Sw Oe ES EO Oe RR ee A 2-7
Using 7/7 EZ PisGes FUN «x5 6.005.008 ORs C66 05S CoO 89S KASD 2-7
RTH FAERIE ALL SO a sexed aiken eae ntid Radi emikioce’amals H's 2-8
PRE FOR A ETN LOG RIOO pis dhdipcias nin cen eee eae beh ene eeate 6 2-8
Working With One of the Files on the Desktop ...............0005 2-10
saving Desktop Files to DISK sa ves eco saws gee 008 vee nvs wen weowern 2-10
Removing Files From the DeSKtop « 2... 0605 ie. cas cee ee vee eee v eee 2-12
Quitting 4/7 E-Z PiOCGs: its cay vee oes cs. 5 es eee eS OS HE eR Hs 2-13
Using Other Activities Menu Options ............. 2. eee ee eee eee 2-14
Changing the Current Disk Drive or SOS Prefix.................. 2-14
Listing Files orc ine Laurent DISK acne cas cxw wees kan eww eure ee ee 2-15
Creating a New SUDGIFOCTOF wc ccs ces vesecnesws enw cow con wee wees 2-16
Deleting Files From ine Olshiasx cn axa cca reewcawews cam wee eon ees 2-16
POM 4 BIANK DISK sas icas coy sey Kes Kew RRRewe KOR ORS HES 2-16
Selecting the Standard Location of the Data Disk ................ 2-17
LL Ok se teccambads Bien wait neeieie wieaiomewariCman 2-18
OE OE POE: cetctcevtaicnibabileons etna tea aon mi mbeemdnaniiels 2-18
Moving Back and Forth Between Files ...............c0ce eee 2-18
Saving the File You're: Working ON issivces cos cane cas vxeueowaves 2-18
Prinung a CODY OT INS DISDIAY ves cas Kesanww eos Kem Hed Has LORS 2-19
Keeping Track of Available Desktop Space ................ceee. 2-19
Chapter 3—Understanding the Data Base
The Data Base’s TWo Main FUNCTIONS 2.0.00. 0605 oe cee ves bee eevee een 3-1
BNC TIIEY FIO sconce sesacmnecmcsacasen mee: Sibi: ERENCE RR eas Bee HA Ke RR ES 3-2
Fe NTS oo exccomaee own Kaw 604.NSS. SWE RENE EUR EE Be eR Wee we 3-3
Chapter 4—Working With Data Base Information
CFEC res EX ERIE CRE FU maces sae Bed ace: ik RE ee Ce on 4-2
rianning a New Data Base: Fil€@:ss ses cas cies eos exe eer ews o48 088 We 4-2
Creating He Files: «2% ccsese rune cow any wen Res HER TO NEES OOS eee 4-3
FIO SCIAIGN ges. ces wae nen aie WORMS Ses KES BES Ada RS BRS BS 4-3
PRG TG (RSI FUG aacens ceo sed 60% cw ooo ori eae om 4-4
Fe KALE RU ek 0 ERS DEIR Hee Kee mad Seow ye wepaien 4-5
Fron ® CREO FS Fibs oss ceseeenteenkt on en enero 4-6
Multipte.ana: Single Record. FOrnnNats ccsw0ccsseevs can wes exe weewewees 4-6
INSOTUNG FOCOIGS sees i040 02s cvs ces POWER ees AS CR ROS HOO 4-7
ReCOIGS INIO @ NOW ENS « csy cvswng cen Gee wewis OHS is teN 664 25% Ka 4-7
Pecoriis (tO Gh ERIS FUG sa -c06 660 2065.54 Kae Kwan dnn 4-8
1 SOS eC LAVOE 6s seaeag tie mine ecw Komen wanna 4-8
FT IRC een VOU icka aor see ein mean ies-e ee ee nes 4-9
PLING SPORE DON IAN EIINS ii00 edd cae eeiweewnns eer peas eae 4-9
Typing and. Editing ENHGS: v10:600.0rs00s see ceewew saan exe 64K 4-10
IOI EMeSics cas xan xes caw cow cow G00 €R% KOE ERS BEES HS% BER Be 4-10
SG SUNGEI VAIUBS sven sesecus Kes Oe As 18S OG RR RRS 4-10
LSttig DAISS GAO TCS ccs oo. 55. 05s F555 OSG hw ewe ene nned so wes 4-11
Re ee et kde sities id hee eitedk cakes Semen 4-13
Cursor Movement In Multiple-and Single-Record Layout ....... 4-14
Cursor Movement In Multiple-Record Layout................5. 4-14
Cursor Movement In Single-Record Layout ..............0000. 4-15
DBIStIe) RECOIGS ccawaws cus cam caw Bas KOS Eo CEWH ONE BOR REA EEE OG HRS 4-15
CONUS TOCINGS co cxcwnawie.cme ery HES Kee HR HRS RRRRREY HER BRS OSE KES 4-17
COW CAG FOGG occas ins 505 cee 40s Hae tee cern com War ore 4-17
CO 7IiG (SIGNS CF SBC GIIG ass cx see hein deenoeenwkerewn wee wus 4-17
FRAN SNA OD cease eer sapib Asin nae Nhat ad tees ees Rak shah ne ne donee Wea. 4-18
EBD LAY Lae POCONOS iacace cyrncectoucwncn mies Raw, con seo NE Bee wee 4-18
“
'
rmmm wm mR OF Oe
Ky
cmt ot a
eo
lt} if ft fteOOUklCO lO
bi
Changing Record Selection RUGS ia. sss ces wenwansene cow cen eas 4-18
PINGING Cela ROCONS o5 nos cea c05 £06 958 ORO NEORRNS tay ee eee 4-19
TEA COI FE TRI scission Ses Sesacnnenn ‘Winona esa NIRS 4-20
RETOREING FOOOIGS canncwena dene cher wed awn ne ee arinea CE Re ee ees 4-20
Zooming In ANG GUE sexe ecwcew cre ercaws wes Hed nee. Cee eu exe, we noes 4-2)
Changing the Record Layout vases ces caeses ees wae renews eee care ome 4-21
Changing the Multiple-Record Layout .......... ccc cece eee noes 4-22
Changing the Single-Record Layout.............. eee eee eee 4-23
CHERGING & FIGS Ue ose: s cisin ed AGNES OSD Cee bE IER CRN oa 4-24
Chapter 5—Reporting With the Data Base
FGDOITSIVIOS ces Hes Whe seu wR awe Hed Cee KOR HERERO ew ee 9-2
FGHIGFE FONTATS 0 cnw 600 ced died HOS EOF RESALE ER 5-3
Pets onell w ihanhcnrconceste Siew youn Risa aan era BAG a alk eRe 5-3
Creating € TARIBS SIV IG FRGDON «niin: nie cota eed ie mle en ew won & 5-5
Summary of Considerations and FeatureS........... 0. cee e eens 5-6
Moviria Te GUrsol: <aswevees pwe cee wes eee weswawwsww sew awe ses 5 5-7
Charioindg Column Width sacs ess ves wes nes aspwewswwsnse nes exe 5-7
Switching Caleanry Positions’: ccs ses van con cas sewers v coe ene ues 5 5-8
Re Ee ee ee ee er Yee 5-9
Inserting Previously Deleted CategorieS.............e cece eens 5-9
Changing Record Selection Rules. cs css ies eee swe nemearacee 6 5-9
Arranging Records for the Report 6.6 isis cvs cow cesieeswewwerwees 5-10
Ristit Justifying GaleGONSS iss ces cox ces avs crm wenn wenwenwew err 5-10
Adding or Changing Report Names and Titles ................. 5-11
Creating a Calculated Category. was cis ios 0a boas ee SS KD 5-11
AGEING ANG REMOVING TOS «cnn se none nod eae enn soe GOS 5-13
DOTOLIG ahGtne TOS inc scx trnnns ces seo wmweieeaeeon 5-14
Creating a Labels-Styie Repottiiciss saw cas occ wee wai wrcnamuareere ecu ews 5-15
Summary of Considerations and Features ...............ee eee 5-15
MOVING Tie CUPSel's ces sies:n cas eee 254 tem cam Cos EEOC ae ews oO 5-17
Moving Tid CaIsGGTi8e scs.c.cas cus ian cos wae HES RH WWE BOE HRS 9-17
Deleting Categories or Spacing Lines From the Report ......... 5-17
Inserting Spacing-Lines or Previously Deleted Categories....... 5-18
LOT LISTING CAROOONIOS scteurdien ew cies Per tit Ki aeotees 5-18
Arranging Records tor tite Report ois cas eas cos saieea ceces comer 5-19
Changing Record Selection Rules .......... 0. cee eee eee e seen 5-19
LOOKING GC MGCOMS cis ces sass coin ae He bs HEE ES tos DE OWIR THOR 5-20
Printing Category Names on the Report............ccee ee eeees 5-20
Adding or Changing Report Names or Titles .................. 5-20
WGP ING WI) PTFE acerca ene eee Ci Re eens Kaa 5-21
Using Leftand Right Margin OpONS: cis css caw cca ose Rernceneene 5-22
Using Top and Bottom Margin Options .......... cece eee eee 5-24
Using Other Formatting Options «ics ws can caus eee coy 16s exe Hee 5-26
Determining Spacing in Tables-Style Reports.............+..55 5-27
Determining Spacing in Labels-Style Reports...............55. 5-27
Chapter 6—Understanding the Word Processor
The Word Processor's Two Main FUNCTIONS...“ 206 sce & 04.4 ca9 cee Kas Wes g 6-1
PENN PERNA a icine pbb stk "inn Ve nk acetate Ser A tans a in“ 6-2
I i a ine a ae in Sala ciel mt ae a aa a ele ae ors 6-2
Chapter 7—Working With Word Processor Documents
PRICE: CT LATING cntse ead Sees som cen ees ees ne athe I SR Ree St Se 7-2
Planning a Word Processor DOCUMENL, 6: cise tice ces cies 6 eae eo wee 7-2
Creating the DOCUuMGi ss cvs oes eos vecw caw wen can con Hews cen wae we 7-4
Fr6m SGPStel iz ccas cen es wen Gas 8 ER WER eee we ee ee 2 Bee Gwe 2s 7-4
Prom a Text (ASCU) File... cai can acn.2 ees eae Bes eRe oS 2 ee oe eS 7-5
Typing afte EqiiNG IMFOFTIATION oc wince wince cme sos ed eae ha © Uk COR EES 7-5
NCAT Vr EOIN hacsiense tien osacn ea eee won Gerken Sind ween ee Wek Ww eRe oe Whe 7-5
Lista FE PLS” ios case aanw. cour sion sein ae wine eee wien ese Mana wk tem 7-6
[riSertine: INTOTMATON s cca eee pew wes wwe core nue ee het one Ke OS we 7-6
Strikirig Over Existing INfOrmation casa cos gus ves wes wey vows ves ox 7-7
Editing (AfGrMation, «.. wo cx ces see eek ew cee Ee RD BES ees OF 7-7
Moving the Cursor Within 4 DOCUMENT 14 i. cas caw was eee tens can wes 7-8
NPRAAINES SOA LONI ssc ieatik eres oma ween ee Sheek Hane Some ‘einen “eee cea bie 7-9
Tet eC TIST ID) IOE secire sence ore isso etc somad een eee shane aN Foon 7-9
Deleting Information ............ seed wens: te bla wae deal RES Nea SeenON 7-10
RepMciiG Existing INtOPMGHOM 6s ces een que caw cee cue wae mart seie v 7-11
Replacing One or Several Occurrences of Information......... 7-11
Replacing All Occurrences of Information ..............0eeee. 7-12
Moving Text Within & DOCUMENT. « css wie enced cms sane wine eee web ales 7-13
Copying Text Wan B DOCUMENT teas saw sito wes sen! nex wie cow ti 7-14
PIG WATOTIVIQUIONS wise cumciee wie eirew mer ere ind Rae ein eer ite sess econ 7-15
FING? Pext ics ces ces see wee pes oe wee een siren nae Raw eee ew we 7-15
Finding a SHSCiIIC PAGS: «ees cox ces eee wes weey Hed cow Hey HeG HOW TR 7-17
USING MATKSIS a 005 cc 204 2 an BEG Ce) Ras KES ews RY OE HS HG HEN Hs 7-18
SOG MALRGIS nce sce vies acme ons eed HES KAS AES OEE OG ORS RS BEY GA 7-18
FPEEBET ETN Tan aaa atc Wigs “Gass Neh abla Me haa Pandata ae ae 7-18
Ferelined Gistiarie Tor Piet ce ccot sex wit poner cies aera ern Nae es 7-19
sing TAOS « ccev ses wow oes soewnww eee ens nes Wars eae bine Cw RUN HKD Oe 7-19
Setting and ‘Clearing Tabs siswa ecco cies aes since wwe wee cee Be Be 7-19
Moving the Cursor to: TabSs esac ces cee cos eee wees caw wes Hes es 9% 7-19
Changing thie Name of Your File « cas sew ses wus teoe ews oa wes Hes Ws 7-20
4
mek kia iiss
* |
Chapter 8—Formatting a Word Processor Document
PRCA LS AIT is ncet: wesc: tenes Weare incense: doin eps: pata ames “Sete wit ‘nda At 8-2
Using the Word Processor's Printer Options 3 wos ees ces ces cas cons cer 8-6
What Are Printer Options.......... 568 CER HOR CG BES KEN ES SOR BEE eS 8-6
Z5oming I Gry Printer OBNONS ic cus wns caw wae vee Kes oe aD Fes 8-6
GHAAGING PIINTSY OGTONS: 02 eir ein RES URR Ey diel as Sila ated 8-8
///E-Z Pieces’ Best Guesses for Main Printer Options ......... 8-9
COUT CHIME ICO aR) SEGNEE peep codecs pes wire seek rece rn ta wean eNO 8-9
PTC MEIN) enise snc erat tas eed: eee eves annie ae ee Re Blew ee ve Ree 8-9
LEE MATIN wet ese. cx ena eas wes wed Ve peN ERE EE BOG ENG ERY ESS YS 8-10
PUOTIC MIBIOW cs cast own caw Bs or Wes Ree SER WERE HEN GOR HER OES OS 8-10
Canton Pant: DEASiy so cas cus cep Kas 5 9 SE KR BS Ea 8-11
CTT WE SET) a. teen specs xe vores wine Amie eenrareu brad ven eta 8-12
BEEP IRENE SEED 5 cect “elicit ate ie inst “ahaa iat psihladec tesa Nila laa aden 8-12
Top: Margin: wes cx pins Weta acnoelitleaR tana Shen: hana ace poeta deed tei mek 8-12
BOLO METOUT san can wos cru wen Ce ie eed EOS Bam area mie wae ace J 8-13
single, Double; and Triple Spacing « ics cas cas cen wan s pawn 6 es 8-13
Lines POF WG c was nee aey WAS CSW EH ERS ESN OU EE ES Ce eR: 8-13
Res LAC: cas WAG Cd GSS BAR GW Rhor Haw dene Wer onde Berean ee 8-14
WARE IE hed SCN Ns Gehan sind aloes! Wilks heap ise Wand eae tain Hates 8-14
Making Hanging Paragraphs and Bullets (Indenting) ........ 8-14
Justifying, Unjustifying, and Centering ...............0 econ 8-16
Using Page Headers and FOOCS:s ccs ees vees ow ees ews oon Cex 8-17
Using Special Printing TECHNique)s « aes cas 205 x65.8 soe dos wos vx COD 8-19
Using Baldtace ag WAdeEINING xs sos 6.c4 Bah 4 Kade’ bow vow rm 8-19
LISiTIG SUPETSCHENS STIG SUBSEROTE ce nce nace sevice ere wan semis 8-20
ARCs GES OEE ceed et aa Mies Rie Seed med er ea eet eee 8-21
Gontrolling Paging and Page Numbers? wis san was ves cass 6 caw ee eee 8-21
Calculating Page Nembers caw can vow ces oes ang eee ¥ erOERE Eos 8-22
SVSCITVING A NOW PAGE « ces sey ows cus ERG Wes Hes CF ws 8 ws 8-22
Sspecitving “Groups” of Information x sac ces oe5 was cons ¢ es 8-23
Fae Pe See PI cn csi ieee SaaS reso abla bas See es 8-24
PUTT iee FP DECIR So scscey wees nsecpnie eden Sermon imo tceast okay hci! took 8-24
Typing Information Tron the KR6YDOS(G woccwkd cna saw sae mon eed econ 8-25
Chapter 9—Understanding the Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet’s Two Main Functions........ aia a cl iolet 9-1
ea Tater act seek Sit Miles? Sc hhc ad Yd" eisai "os aa etc ahaa hbo 9-2
er ee eR OAM RR air visa linha elite ened alee race amy Saeki ioreh apni tite Tetons 9-3
Chapter 10—Working With Information in Worksheets
Making 2: VWOrkSNGel « 6ss eva wes ows ee" Oe% ESE OOS ERG ES KES FERS EOS 10-3
Planning a New WOrKSNG6t xs ces cuou cos ows ees HOR Kon CoS Bees aH 10-3
Viiiat Answers DG YOU Wat? s aac 6.s5.4.85.8 Kaw eco meus meee me waves 10-6
What Values Produce the Answers? ............cecceceeeeee 10-6
What Formulas Make the Values Produce the Answers? ...... 10-6
What Should Your Worksheet Look Like? ................... 10-7
Greating ne WOrkSNOSl sei kas cas ons cen ews BES EOE BHR REN OES OeD s 10-8
FLOM! SCARS aa.cos «00% 04 em ROR ORR BRE RES Fk CRE BOR EER OES 10-9
PIO WIE PUSS ¢ ces sc5 eae Has SW SSG BRE EOW BE Kae Gee owe cares 10-10
Be ee Ne i Sl lia a a a aa 10-10
Working With Worksheet Standard Values..............00e cee. 10-11
Details About Worksheet Standard Values................0000- 10-13
PRUs I Cie seaweed eek, wears cee AGO PER AND ae wee RE: 10-14
Ae! POONA «> ces coy ces twa Kew R Sew ORR we ES Hee ES BREE. OOS 10-15
CSOMOTIN VIGUISs exe ce nan. Se ws KEES HES ROE SS SS ees 10-15
POC eCIOELD 16.1. Wucim Beem Sy SR GD S58 a saddens ede ae aes ne ae 10-15
PIN aha ei ard si tina atta hl at Sa eh a na 10-16
Checking Standard Values in Effect 2.0 ccs secsa coe sae cone can we oi 10-16
Changing Worksheet Standard Values ............. ccc cc eeeee 10-17
Typing:and: Editing Infonnaiion as ess wes ss gon eee ewe Oey OOR BES KG 10-18
Typ ENWIGS 2s css voswawse co 25y o8s Bes HER OS OSS OS OR RS Gs 10-18
BO ERGs a5 n54 cas. Wr ASee RE OST SS OES KES Re score enw ery cw 10-18
SEALE ee is 26S aah BBY ae Sram esac Sa Geld aes co abbas adaceltsd- ea? Venta ee 10-19
Re Bee ets octane scariest apt hea arses ion sch elae bea acd oe Na evans 10-20
SRN NI Se ae de leks dooce see ta a ene tl nies siren cea tae 10-20
go en 10-21
PGE canes sone, one aor cee eae eK a BNn RR ee eee ee ee ee 10-22
ACitrinietc: FUniCHONS. sca pms was He TSE s OER CEN ERE CSS 2) EEK en 10-24
CO VEE orcs ey Gee CHS BES FS KG LG caw sree ese Wak Racers 10-24
a a al eh te Nal a el ila 10-24
MRE NE Pete EEE Ge oe sentis pci eeesie Mace led Seeks ayia cma Acie ca es 10-25
BY SEIECTING ANSINAUVOS xx cas manic ants tom coe ean owe ea 10-25
PINANGIAl PUNCHONSG esac. aes cee wen cum gem TERS EEE BAG KES BED 10-26
Logical FuNnCionvi@ FP +a sss cos con aos wen Hees Cee ERS 885 FRG 10-27
POTN ES ia ce ee C84 HSS HED CRE WEES OES CAG HER RRS DEE OPE HOR RES ES 10-28
Moving the Cursor Within a Worksheet ..............0c0e eee eee 10-30
Mvotr ey VEIT) GOGH LOGIE 2.55 7a. 55% dee cw bas neta nwa wre me eee 10-31
PATER PRL rth LIE: we cnc einen ek een nsseed doen Desc a lta Sn 10-32
ee Pe i crue uals ena wacked ch. toda edie ee es en ee 10-32
LAL FOUTUNES seam wae, men wun oxen. caw wrEN Beg dR ANS CaN BRE ORE 10-34
GOTT Widhics ecu ses cus awe man 50s RGSS ERE ER ESN CES 85S BORK 10-34
POISON coses5: 26% ok EFS CRS NSS OES FSS SARE GS Rew cae cow ames 10-34
oI) Ct LOUIS cre erat. NW- RH des muses “acess eek wR oes tans eee 10-35
N
aml ae
el
ams
Changing Gell Gayoutsies sas can eee een mew coon wane ecu doce cede acs 10-35
Viewing Your Worksheet ............ ee ee 10-36
Setting and Removing a Fixed Titles Area ............e eee eeee 10-36
Working With a Split WORKSHG66E «..3.5 ax cox cs eos wee es Hee wes 10-38
Splitting the Worksheet Into Two Windows .............++- 10-39
Moving the Cursor to the Other Window ........-..-+..+06- 10-40
Synchronizing the TWO WiINdOWS.......... secre ee ee eeeees 10-40
Restoring the Worksheet to One Window .............-++5- 10-41
Blanking Areas of the Worksheet. .......... cee cee cece newer wees 10-41
Deleting Rows OF CoOlUMNS ies cas ous toa bees Hele Hay Ces ews eo Hee 10-42
Inserting ROWS OF COLUMAS we ccs cece ane oslhd Uak WO" BOR URE OR UG 10-43
Moving Columns or Rows Within a Worksheet ..............+5- 10-43
COOVING INTORMATHON ee cae eis wie econ ete alan eae ne eo Rm tow Boos 10-44
What Are’ the Copy-From Cells? siccs sin cae owe sows cece wire sce 10-45
What Aré the Copy-To Cells? sas seas pas ove oe ows ewe woe oe 10-45
Copy the Contents Exactly? « ces cass ven sae cue was cms ves eve 10-49
Copy the Contents Depending on Their New Position? ..... 10-50
Signs Tor COR VIG x csce eca-noe wen reek tie ho maa eed BSE EAS BSE 10-50
SaleWiatine Neve Vales. cum ene ens coe she mee eee en nae eRe ee 10-51
Arranging Information in the Worksheet .............. ee eeeeeee 10-52
Finding a Cell or Specific Information ..........-. eee eee scenes 10-53
Changing the Name Of a Fil. : 5 ieee ced cas oe cos cee cee cee wees 10-54
Chapter 11—Reporting in the Spreadsheet
Determining What Information to Include ......... 2. cece eee eee eee 11-1
Determining the Width of Your Report ... 0.0... ccc cece ees eee eens 11-1
sing Printer QOuOns os ase con eos cee nee wee pee we ees Gs ow owe wens 11-2
Lattand RIGHT Margin Oplicniswes eco xas% us ew eee cay cen ews eos 11-3
Tep:and Botton Margin Options: ..04 ss14 ws sea ves coy oes aR Kes 11-4
Rr FT CN ces mess sesie ieee nine eae een A eA Be teed 11-6
Determining Spacing in Reports ......cceccee cen ereaneeweenne 11-7
Chapter 12—Using Cut and Paste
How Does Citand Paste WOrK? 2. ..0 n0 s00s des GA tea ew eae cos ea TEI
Cut and Paste With Data Base Information .............0ecee ewes 12-3
Moving or Copying Data Base Records to Another Data Base
BETTE. ierping, gnc secasech cmsan, mien aici Solin cri Saas Secataneachiea ice aaneak Roan east 12-3
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for a Word Processor
DOGUITIONT 5 cca 4.045 G55 BER BSG BE Hes eee es re es ew oem 12-5
Cut and Paste With Word Processor Documents............ 5 REE Ew 12-6
Cut and Paste With Spreadsheet Information ................05. 12-7
Moving or Copying Spreadsheet Information to Another
SPGROSHOe FG sccwacis cs axe nee eeommenwemena meee 12-7
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for a Word Processor
DOCUITGM. scx 649 255. 5-Go% UNS 1894S CER RS err OY OT ED 12-8
Chapter 13—Printers and Printing
PUTS ERGOT PFE ari sae pnd, rks Gs eee eae Meee ee eA RS aoe aoa 13-2
PONCNG 10'S PORNIE s iis ios cee cos eeneennens peers rE eee 13-3
Printing 16 DISK ssiccs cox cances cas cee eeavews eee ewe ace eee nes ees 13-3
PAntING 16 A TEXRE(ASGID Files ccs ces cas + cos cee ces eos eee Saw nas 13-3
PHONG Tie CIBDGRG xs cag sceecrney LER% hee ROS CS Re aA 13-4
Peis fe PE Pe es ass ete be RR Be Kee enti eae 13-4
Peruri 8 TOR Ce ice wns maw PE ea eons eee were wrecimocniwnn 13-4
Printing @ Hard: Gopy orine DISDIAY 2 ius s<sc<em cos eoe cen pwewien 13-4
RGBOUE PIiNnterSces ces cas < coe HES See (Om ewe Wee CHE OER s GR4 BOW HES OR BOO 13-5
Specifying Information About Your Printer ............ 0.0 c eee eee 13-6
RUGING & POD scx ¢.ig.c.c5.5. cee HOG OS RG HES ESSE ST FRE OK ERS 13-6
PI ah PEGE cenadwn cee cee ced Rae £08 BOs Klee aes GS EO aw 13-9
Changing Printer SOGCHICATIONS «0 cis exe ae od cae ecw ccm me ern 13-9
Changing (he Biselay PAM! § xs one «ie nwa bios ermemmern wae Gum * 13-10
PRN G sccmewen bre eins Hew GIS RARERKE Ha OmE Gals BD OIE Re RORRRE 8 13-10
Printing Data Base Rens cs siscany ose wan 6am cas Ber ewan t 13-10
Printing Word Processor Documents ...... 0.060. eeeceee dese 13-11
MEGUGSUNG PATHE 2. ave s05 Ge iF 059 TES ees OS ER sees 13-11
POLI ker eer) PROG ons kad Sauter etc al Ged teens 13-12
PeUSING TEA SOGCING PIRCE 4 408 ea dies wad Kew weoreomns 13-12
Printing Spreadsheet HOPOWtS ee ssicice cw cos eae aes ties ence ws 13-12
Appendices
Appendix A—Using /// E-Z Pieces with SOS and a Profile.......... A-1
Appendix B—Sending /// E-Z Pieces files over Phone Lines........ B-1
ACRE asic sss ae asa aeons et aia ae ene. at naar leceypnenman anne wag: ern Last Pages
mrimiemiemimimrmrtmiemmmtm mm mm re rm we
* a! aa sal
ia
igi
ms 6 0OClLiCk, CCC) (asd) (<$sCshkhtitihkam)( (G$SCSncan (<Ge Ca sc ate
ABGOTINIS MANGA os: ee pes Cos ewe se Cah DOS BREED 188 CHR HER Ow OES P-2
WGI 1G SUA wie 6 es 5S ies Bae cca OR 33.8 SEED Se RES FO P-3
Er AT TOS ace nome doesn carmen nice RG ee ed a eae P-3
SGA TEs se CAE i den ererernveorn eat iene eee Res P-4
SUT GGRS CES VION eas ne ee ome mee ne ee me eR men ee P-4
P-1
About This Manual
This manual contains reference information that describes all the features
of ///E-Z Pieces™. It contains the following chapters and appendices.
— Chapter 1, Understanding ///E-Z Pieces, presents a general overview
of /// E-Z Pieces and discusses ///E-Z Pieces files.
— Chapter 2, Working With / / / E-Z Pieces, tells how to interact with / // E-
Z Pieces and includes instructions for using menu options.
— Chapter 3, Understanding the Data Base, discusses the // / E-Z Pieces
Data Base’s main functions, activity flow, and file guidelines.
— Chapter 4, Working With Data Base Information, explains how to create
Data Base files, keep information up to date, and display it in different
ways.
— Chapter 5, Reporting With the Data Base, details how to create Data
Base Reports.
— Chapter 6, Understanding the Word Processor, summarizes the / / / E-Z
Pieces Word Processor’s main functions, activity flow, and file guidelines.
— Chapter 7, Working With Word Processor Documents, tells how to use
the Word Processor to create and edit documents.
— Chapter 8, Formatting a Word Processor Document, tells how to arrange
a document the way you want it.
— Chapter 9, Understanding the Spreadsheet, summarizes the /// E-Z
Pieces Spreadsheet’s two main functions, illustrates its flow of activities,
and lists file guidelines.
— Chapter 10, Working With Information in Worksheets, presents steps for
using the Spreadsheet to create sophisticated worksheets with a
minimum of effort.
— Chapter 11, Reporting With the Spreadsheet, explains how to create
Spreadsheet reports.
— Chapter 12, Using Cut and Paste, tells how to use / / / E-Z Pieces’ cut and
paste feature to combine information of different types.
— Chapter 13, Printers and Printing, presents how to communicate
information to ///E-Z Pieces about your printer and tells how to print
reports and documents.
— Appendix A tells how to use ///E-Z Pieces with a ProFile™.
— Appendix B tells how to send ///E-Z Pieces information over phone
lines.
Chapter tables of contents help you find what you want. The explanation of
each feature contains numbered instructions and practical tips for using
that feature.
p-2
rer waar OmrlhrlOllreere lo
mm sm oT
hy
im/
isi} kell Che
Ln
Where To Start
Before beginning to use ///E-Z Pieces, you should first make backup
copies of all the disks you received with the package.
Then begin with Chapter 1 of this manual, to learn how to get started. For
those users who are experienced at using one or all of the three types of
software systems contained in ///E-Z Pieces, you should read at least
through Chapter 2. These first two chapters, along with the “help screens”,
contain information that will allow you to begin using the sytem right away.
The remainder of the manual may then be used as a reference document to
answer questions that may arise as you become more proficient at using
///E-Z Pieces.
For those less experienced users, each chapter of this manual contains
useful instructional material on the use of Data Base, Word Processing, and
Spreadsheet systems in general, as well as how to use each of the ///E-Z
Pieces. However, as with any computer software, the best way to learn how
to use it is to just dive right in, make some mistakes, and learn how not to
make them again. Again, the remainder of this manual may be used as a
reference document when questions or problems arise.
Most important for both types of users is to experiment as you use ///E-Z
Pieces, and find out for yourself how it can increase your personal
productivity, (and have fun while you're doing it!)
For More Information
These sources of information will help all ///E-Z Pieces users:
— The index at the back of the manual
— The glossary of terms at the back of the manual.
— The HELP information available whenever “OA—? for Help“ appears in
the bottom-right corner of a/ / / E-Z Pieces display.
Keytop Notation: “OA—” stands for “OPEN-APPLE’—‘*?”. In this manual
two keycaps separated by a hyphen means to press one of the keys while
you hold down the other key; then release both. If there isn’t a hyphen
between the keys, press first one, release it, and then press the other.
Be sure to read the sections of your Apple / / / Owner's manual that explain
how to set up your computer and how to use the system utilities to make
backup copies of your disks before you begin with ///E-Z Pieces.
P-3
How This Manual Is Designed
Look for these visual aids throughout the manual:
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Information labeled with /// E-Z Pieces Tips presents different ways of
using a particular feature.
Warning boxes like this alert you to potential problems.
WARNING
“Notes:” point to useful information contained
elsewhere in this or other manuals.
Your Ideals Are Welcome!
A reader response card appears at the back of this / / / E-Z Pieces Manual.
Please fill it out and return it after you’ve had some experience using / / /E-Z
Pieces.
p-4
wy Ww w w Ww ~~
4
im
Chapter 1
Understanding /// E-Z Pieces
Whint (67:77 E-2 PIGGGS! cay cee awk saw ses Hee SEERSSY RET HS CEN EO ees 1-1
EGuibment YOU NGGG. 5 iad vias Kidocc.d 00s 5s 555 RARE ES HOS 1S WER Ce 1-1
How 06667 £7 E<Z. Pres VID a secicain nce seearace en's nen ein we SAR DORE 1-2
PES FF ee AN cic onc nese mtn sess ahh cnn ea ws areca seth and oa 1-4
File SOUICCS 6 ccc eis cenvas seen eee Wa NONE EN eae ORGS 1-4
General Guidelines for /// E-Z Pieces Files ...............020005- 1-6
FIG LOGBTON 8 ..6 ews siee caw VeN BOR COW SOW NER TESTES Gels 868 BEN OS 1-7
Standard and Current LOCATIONS: « sic c55 €e5 cae cons 66 dae BOK Ss 1-7
Files by Filename or Grouped by Pathname .............e0eeee 1-7
A LI PS a asesececnne ete: eceoe erence seek Keon eR ene MOKA SD 1-8
This chapter presents a general overview of ///E-Z Pieces. It also tells
about ///E-Z Pieces files.
What Is / / / E-Z Pieces?
///€-Z Pieces is a computer applications program that allows you to do
data base management, word processing, and spreadsheet analysis. / / / E-Z
Pieces’ three functions are performed by three software tools that create
and work with a specific kind of information:
— The///E-Z Pieces Data Base allows you to work with information you
normally keep in lists: names and addresses, schedules, inventories.
— The///E-Z Pieces Word Processor is for writing reports, memos, letters.
— The ///E-Z Pieces Spreadsheet lets you create information you nor-
mally put on a worksheet and manipulate with a calculator: budgets,
financial forecasts, income and expense statements.
Because / //E-Z Pieces is an integrated program, you can move back and
forth at will among these three software tools and the files they create. And
you can combine these three kinds of information, cutting and pasting one
kind of information into another. ///E-Z Pieces’ integration greatly in-
creases your ability to work with information in the easiest and most effi-
cient way.
Equipment You Need
To use ///E-Z Pieces, you'll need this equipment:
— AnApple /// computer.
— Avideo monitor capable of displaying 80 columns of text.
— The///E€E-Z Pieces disks named Boot, Program, and Sample Files.
1-1
To make maximum use of ///E-Z Pieces, you also need either a serial or
parallel printer with the proper interface.
Here’s some other nice-to-have equipment:
— A ProFile, with the interface card in slot 4.
A clock chip installed in your Apple / / /.
One or more external floppy disk drives
How Does ///E-Z Pieces Work?
There are two levels of activity within ///E-Z Pieces, as Figure 1-1
illustrates. The bottom level of activity is performed by the Data base, the
Word Processor, and the Spreadsheet. At this level, you do the actual
work on information, creating and reviewing it, changing it, and printing
it.
At the top level, ///E-Z Pieces contains information about where you
store you files and about your printer. It controls information by moving
files into the “Desktop”, which is the area of the Apple computer's
Random-Access Memory (RAM) that you use to work with your files,
and by saving the files for you after you've worked with them.
As ///E-Z Pieces administers the space on the Desktop, it warns you
when you are running out of Desktop space, and it lets you move
back and forth from one / / / E-Z Pieces file to another.
TOP LEVEL
///E-Z Pieces’ Desktop
WORD PROCESSOR
Bottom Level
Figure 1-1.
///E-Z Pieces’s Two Levels of Activities
///€E-Z Pieces also lets you transfer information from one file into
another, an activity called “cut and paste.” You can cut and paste infor-
mation into another file of the same type; for example, you can cut and
paste Data base information into another Data Base file. You can also
create Data Base and Spreadsheet reports and paste them into Word
Processor documents.
1-2
mn mH OM
Wm
ms
When you cut and paste, you transfer information through the “clip-
board.” The clipboard is a/// E-Z Pieces term that refers to area of the
computer's RAM that is reserved for cut and paste.
DATA BASE
WORD PROCESSOR
Figure 1-2.
///E-Z Pieces Flow Chart
WARNING
Because the Desktop and the clipboard are
actually a part of the memory of the computer,
information in each place disappears when you
turn off the power to the computer or when you
leave ///E-Z Pieces by rebooting another pro-
gram. You should makesure you save new and changed
files permanently before you leave / / / E-Z Pieces.
NOTES:
1. See “Quitting ///E-Z Pieces” in Chapter 2 for
how to leave ///E-Z Pieces safely.
2. See Chapter 13 for complete cut and paste
instructions.
we
=3
Figure 1-3 is a flowchart of ///E-Z Pieces activities. It shows the options
available from the Main Menu and from the Other Activities menu. Flow-
charts specific to the Data Base, the Word Processor, and the Spreadsheet
are in Chapters 3, 6, and 9, respectively.
MAIN MENU
SPREADSHEET
1. From Scratch
WORD PROCESSOR
1, From Scratch
DATA BASE
2. ASCII File : ear 4. “DIF” File
3, “Quick File” file 5. “VisiCalc” File
1 4. “DIF” File
"
| PIQUIG It
Sources of ///E-Z Pieces Files
7
ERE GOAT EUER EGG CSTR ISSTOEA TRUDE THR
~ 2. Text (ASCII) files are sources for Data Base and
u Word Processor files. Text files are files created
by Apple Writer and some data base manage-
ment systems.
. 3. Quick File files are sources for Data Base files.
4. DIF, or Data Interchange Format, files are
sources for Spreadsheet and Data Base files. DIF
files are created by VisiCalc and many other
programs; they allow for easy data interchange
between programs.
5. VisiCalc files are sources for Spreadsheet files.
7, SPECIFY INFORMATION ABOUT PRINTERS
Figure 1-3.
///E-Z Pieces Flow Chart
About / //E-Z Pieces Files
= |
///E-Z Pieces provides an enormous amount of flexibility both in the
sources you can use for files and in the lack of strict guidelines for files. In
addition, it keeps information on the storage location of your files so you
don't have to always tell / // E-Z Pieces where to look when you want to use
a file. This section tells all about file sources, guidelines, and storage
locations.
om |
a)
NOTE:
Specific requirements for each type of file are
listed in Chapters 4, 7, and 10.
me |
File Sources
///E-Z Pieces allows you to create files from scratch using the Data Base,
the Word Processor, and the Spreadsheet. In addition, / / / E-Z Pieces adds
to your data management capability by letting you use files created by other
programs as sources for ///E-Z Pieces files. Then you can use ///E-Z
Pieces’ tools to work with these files. Figure 1-4 provides an overview of
sources for ///E-Z Pieces files. The numbers to the explanations that
follow.
a!
as)
;
imi
im mm mH IW
is
eS
1-5
General Guidelines for / / / E-Z Pieces Files 4 File Location
Table 1-1 contains general guidelines for / / / E-Z Pieces files.
File Feature
Maximum number of
///€-Z Pieces files per
flexible disk
Maximum number of
///€-Z Pieces files per
SOS subdirectory
Maximum number of
///€-Z Pieces files allowed
Guideline
Depends on size of files;
up to 140K total characters
130
1-6
i
= as
The ///E-Z Pieces program contains information about where it should
look for you files. This storage location information is a combination of two
different aspects.
— Whether the storage location is the standard location or the current
location
— Whether you keep files by filename only, or whether you use a ProFile
and/or group them logically by subdirectories.
This section explains both aspects.
Standard and Current Locations
///€-Z Pieces stores information on disk that tells where it should always
on ///E-Z Pieces’ Desktop ra a look for files at startup. This is the “standard location” of your files. You can
Guidelines for filenames 15 characters maximum. override this standard location if you want by providing another, temporary,
The name must start with a : place where ///E-Z Pieces should look. This is the “current location” of
letter, and it can contain x ' files. // / E-Z Pieces saves on disk the standard location from one session to
Only uppercase and lower- the next, but it doesn’t save the current location.
case letters, numbers, ‘i
spaces, an riods. ,
p d periods E 1 ee
- See “Selecting the Standard Location of the
Table 1-1. i i Data Disk” and “Changing the Current Data Disk
General ///E-Z Pieces File Guidlines or SOS Prefix’ in Chapter 2 for information on
Me changing file locations.
NOTE: f y
eee iets Files by Flename or Grouped by Pathnam
you see in the lower-right corner of the display t ; If you store files by filename, you ordinarily keep them on a flexible disk in
may be larger or smaller than that in the manual’s Drive 1 or Drive 2. So your standard or current location is Drive 1 or Drive 2.
illustration. _ You can easily, efficiently, and happily operate / / / E-Z Pieces and store files
a ; without giving another thought to things like SOS prefixes. Just store files
By the Way: It’s always best to give a unique by filename on a disk in a drive. No problem!
name to each file, one that tells you as closely as 5 4 lf you have a large number of files and/or you're using a ProFile to store files,
possible what's in the file. Because of the free- ; you may want to group them by subdirectories. For example you may want
dom ///E-Z Pieces gives you in naming files, it’s to keep personal letters and lists of names and addresses in separate
easy to describe the contents of a file in the a directories. Using subdirectories may make it easier for you to organize
filename. e files.
_ “
—
1-7
If you group files by subdirectories and/or use a ProFile, you should set up a
standard and/or current location using the SOS prefix for the files. The SOS
prefix consists of all the identifying information for the file except the
filename, including the volume name and the subdirectory names. Exam-
ples of pathnames are
/VOLUMES3
/PROFILE/FINANCE
/LISTS
NOTE:
Complete information about using SOS prefixes
to identify files and about pathnames is in the
Apple /// Owner's Manual.
Backing Up Files
It's important to “back up” files, or make duplicate copies of them, fre-
quently. You should always have a recent copy of / / / E-Z Pieces data disks,
stored in a safe place away from dust, magnetic fields, and temperature
extremes. The easiest way to back up your ///E-Z Pieces data disks is to
make duplicate copies of them using the Volume Copy commands on the
SOS System Utilities disk. The user’s manual for your system tells you how.
mm mim rm iran
i
mj a at! ao!
mi
im. eal ani «
tal
ia!
Chapter 2
Working With /// E-Z Pieces
staring to: Uses // E-Z PICGS 5 x van 155 Kee ben 00% BHR BRR Kos Gm BH 2-2
Communicating With /°/ E-Z PiO66S.es os x cas eee cag Bed Gee KAS ea we 2-2
LISING CBEN-ABAIE COMMAS ics sce cnsd oxen Red aod noe wah Ge be 2-3
FGSOONEING CO FICO cas ck 8445-05 e eK ee ORE OER HOR EOS bee HE OO 2-3
SSC GC MENU QDUGY sas anmatewias areca nes sath Sen ETO 2-3
Selecting an Answer to a QUESTION «ccc cis ester ee ees eves. 2-4
Cnoosing Files From Lists cess s ces seevs ecieseay evecmewes ene 2-5
Answering Questions by Typing Information................5. 2-6
Typing and Editing Information: General Guidelines............. 2-6
Using / / 7 E-2. Pieces” WO CuUISOIS «20:5 cos. c0n xa Hee re eden’ 2-6
LS PTE) ers ncaa ch? Eee Gia Boe Ren mee eeneee Kan ieee 2-7
LISI ES toe ics ge eae awe oe Oe eae kee ie Go ORS eae Ce 2-7
Using {7 Ext Pieces’ FIO? « ces cos cag see tebe dee cay ew Kem Kw 65 2-7
Wisingd Malin Menu COpUOns as as tou can Res wes 1 ewe BOS ae ORE BER HOw WEN 2-8
AGGNG Fils tO ING DGEKIOD < ccc cee key 00Ss cas oS Hes Bes Ree KS Ha 2-8
Working With One of the Files on the Desktop ................ 2-10
mevind DESKIOD PIGS IO DISK. co6 é den cin cde ocd eee Gen we Ooo > 2-10
Removing Files:From ie DESkKtOD aii.<.6.csa vices cos auveaea ean 2-12
OuUing 7? ft EE PleCeS ne cenenssectue dite mes yecewne caw HUE 2-13
ising Other Activities Menu Opulonis v.<s-<xsse eve wer emennaues ax 2-14
Changing the Current Disk Drive or SOS Prefix ............... 2-14
Listing Flues Of The Gurren DISK os650 scares. cae cis cen weeeescws 2-15
Creating & NEW SUDCIFACIONY «.v.c54-ca5 one sch 60 ded dws deeweaess 2-16
Sree Fuge: FIOM Te LIBN. cy. i cod Bud doe ces aen cee a gee een 2-16
POCneine & Blatt (IS ccc-wawx gos Ges wae RAW See eae Cee Loe ears GS 2-16
Selecting the Standard Location of the Data Disk ............. BAT
USING SPeCIAl FEBTIIOS ces « cnc cow cae Hon Hes 0404 GN Bon BER Gas Goa Ws 2-18
ASKING FO? FGID + ccaw cae ug Gas RET WEA AURA SRE OOS 168 BRS FRE 2-18
Moving Back and Forth Between Files ..............00ceeeeees 2-18
Saving the File You're Working O19. « oie oak con cee cot bee cee caw es 2-18
Prine @ COoov Oring DISGOY o.4.d0c 140 es eed encsunan eee wews 2-19
Keeping Track of Available Desktop Space................005. 2-19
This chapter presents general information about working with ///E-Z
Pieces. It tells how to start up ///E-Z Pieces and how to interact with
/// E-Z Pieces. Italso includes instructions for using Main Menu and Other
Activity Menu menu options.
2-1
Starting to Use ///E-Z Pieces
Before you start using ///E-Z Pieces, make a copy of the ///E-Z Pieces
boot disk. Use the SOS System Utilities to do this. Use the copies and put the
originals in a safe place.
To start up ///E-Z Pieces, follow these instructions:
1. Put the ///E-Z Pieces Boot disk into Drive 1.
2. |f the monitor is off, turn it on.
3. If the computer is off, turn it on. Press “CONTROL-RESET” if it is
already on. It takes several seconds for the computer to read the
instructions on the Boot disk. Then ///E-Z Pieces asks for the
Program disk.
4. Remove the Boot disk, insert the Program disk, and press “RETURN”.
Then ///E-Z Pieces asks for the date, which it uses when you save
files during this session.
5. Type today’s date using the form shown on the screen, then press
return. (If you have aclock chip with a battery, press “RETURN” to
accept the date.) ///E-Z Pieces displays the Main Menu.
NOTE:
If you want to start up ///E-Z Pieces from a
ProFile, see Appendix A
WARNING
If you are using one disk drive, ///E-Z Pieces
asks you to switch the Program disk and the data
disks occasionally, whenever it needs more
instructions or more data. Switch the disks then,
but don’t switch the disks unless / / / E-Z Pieces
asks you to.
lf you are using a second disk drive or ProFile for your data disks, follow
directions in “Selecting the Standard Location of the Data Disk” in this
chapter to let ///E-Z Pieces know where to look for your data.
Communicating With / //E-Z Pieces
This section provides general information on communicating with ///E-Z
Pieces, information relating to your activities with ///E-Z Pieces whether
2-2
nn ptm mmm mem hl lUrrllCU
1m]
(ml
’
‘_o 2
=
you are using the Desktop Manager, the Data Base, the Word Processor, or
the Spreadsheet. It tells how to:
— use Open-Apple commands
— respond to prompts
— type and edit information
— use “ESC”
— use///E-Z Pieces’ Ruler.
Using Open-Apple Commands
Open-Apple commands are instructions to /// E-Z Pieces to use a special
feature. They are always a combination of “OPEN-APPLE” and another key
that reminds you of what you want to do. For example, the Help command is
a combination of “OPEN-APPLE” and “?”, which is written in this manual as
“OPEN-APPLE”-“?”. The Save command is a combination of “OPEN-
APPLE” and “S”, which is written in this manual as “OPEN-APPLE”-"S”.
You should hold down “OPEN-APPLE” and press the other key lightly to
give the command. Open-Apple commands usually mean the same thing
whether you are using ///E-Z Pieces’ Data Base, Word Processor, or
Spreadsheet. This means you don't have to learn a lot of new keystrokes
when you change tools, The keys that go with “OPEN-APPLE” remind you
of what you want to do, so they're easy to remember.
Responding to Prompts
There are four typs of ///E-Z Pieces prompts; prompts that:
— ask you to select an option from a menu
— ask you to select an answer to a question
— let you select files from lists
— ask you to type information.
Selecting a Menu Option
A menu is alist of numbered options from which you select one, such as the
Main Menu, illustrated in Figure 2-1. You select an option in either of these
two ways:
— Press “UP-ARROW” and “DOWN-ARROW’” until the option you want is
highlighted. Press “RETURN” to confirm your selection.
or
— Type the number of the option you want and press “RETURN”.
2-3
// / E-Z Pieces’ default option is the option it thinks you'll choose. It’s always
highlighted, which makes it easy to select that option first.
Figure 2-1.
Main Menu
Selecting an Answer to a Question
Sometimes ///E-Z Pieces provides several answers to questions and
expects you to select one. For example, the following question asks whether
you want to print from the beginning of the document, from the beginning of
the current page, or from the cursor position:
“Print from? Beginning This page Cursor position”
Your three possible responses are “Beginning“, “Thi i" é‘
= ae g’, “This page”, or “Curs
position”. To select a response: mai .
— Choose the highlighted answer by pressing “RETURN”.
— Choose one of the other answers by using “RIGHT-ARROW to highlight
the answer then pressing “RETURN”.
— Type the first letter of any response, such as “b”, “t”, or “c”.
2-4
ia a aa ak
m mm
mmm wm me om ©
aa!
Choosing Files From Lists
///€-Z Pieces presents lists of files from which you choose one or more:
— When you ask for files for the Desktop, you get the List of /// E-Z
Pieces Files on the current disk. Figure 2-2 illustrates such a list.
— When youask to save files or remove files from the Desktop, you get
a list of files on the Desktop.
— When youask to delete files from the current disk, you geta list of all
the files on your disk, not just /// E-Z Pieces files.
Here’s how to choose files from lists:
— To choose one file from a list, use “DOWN-ARROW?” and “UP-
ARROW?” to highlight the file’s name. Then press “RETURN”.
— To choose more than one file from a list:
1. Use “DOWN-ARROW’” to move the highlight to a file you want. Then
use “RIGHT-ARROW’” to mark the name of the first file.
2 Use “DOWN-ARROW’ to highlight the next file you want and putan
arrow by it with “RIGHT-ARROW".
3. Continue to use “DOWN-ARROW” and “RIGHT-ARROW” to mark
files.
4. Use “UP-ARROW’”, or “DOWN-ARROW", and “| EFT-ARROW” to
remove arrows if you choose a file by mistake.
5. Press “RETURN” after you mark all the files that you want.
lf you are choosing files by marking their names with arrows, the highligh-
ted file isn’t chosen unless it has an arrow.
Figure 2-2.
List of ///E-Z Pieces Files
Answering Questions by Typing Information
Certain ///E-Z Pieces questions ask you to type information in response.
For example, when you are creating a new file, // / E-Z Pieces asks you to
type the name of the new file:
“Type a name for this new file:”
The guidelines that apply when you’re answering questions like this are in
the next section.
Typing and Editing Information: General Guidelines
This section contains general guidelines for typing and editing ///E-Z
Pieces information. It describes how to use /// E-Z Pieces’ two cursors and
how to delete information. Specific instructions for typing and editing in the
Data Base, the Word Processor, and the Spreadsheet are in Chapters 4, 7
and 10, respectively. =
Using ///E-Z Pieces’ Two Cursors——
///€E-Z Pieces has two cursors:
— The blinking bar is the insert cursor. When you see this cursor, whatever
you type is inserted at the cursor position. The characters to the right of
the cursor are moved farther to the right.
2-6
Th wm Ww
Cr
t
sat |
oa
— The blinking square is the overstrike cursor. When you see this Cursor,
whatever you type replaces the character under the cursor. However,
existing carriage returns move to the right.
After you type the date when you first start up /// E-Z Pieces, you see the
insert cursor. Change between the two cursors any time with “OPEN-
APPLE”-“E” (for edit).
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Some ///E-Z Pieces users find it easier to use
the overstrike cursor to type new information, as
well as to replace existing information.
a
Deleting Information
There are two ways to delete information.
— To delete a few letters or numbers, one at a time, use “DELETE”. (For
users of earlier Apple /// Computers without an enhanced keyboard,
the “Backslash Key“ (\) functions as the “DELETE” key.) Each time you
press “DELETE”, one character to the left of the cursor is deleted.
— To delete from the cursor position to the end of an entry or line press
“CONTROL’-“Y".
Using “ESC”
“ESC” is ///E-Z Pieces’ bailout key. When you press “ESC”, you return to
the previous display or erase your response to a prompt.
When you have the Main Menu displayed and you press “ESC”, you return
to the last file you were using unless you saved files or used one of the Other
Activity Menu menu options in the meantime. Then /// E-Z Pieces does not
save the name of the file you were last using.
Whenever you get to a place you don’t want to be, just press “ESC” and you
return to the previous display.
Using / //E-Z Pieces’ Ruler
///€-Z Pieces’ Ruler divides a file into eight approximate parts and then lets
you move through the file by parts. If you add information to the file or delete
information, the parts change.
The Ruler is acombination of “OPEN-APPLE” and “1” through “9”. It works
whether you are using a Data Base, aWord Processor, ora Spreadsheet file.
2-/
Using Main Menu Options
This section tells how to use ///E-Z Pieces’ Main Menu options, including
— Adding files to the Desktop
— Working with one of the files on the Desktop
— Saving Desktop files to disk
— Removing files from the Desktop
— Quitting
Adding Files to the Desktop
To add files to the Desktop:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don’t,
you can get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Add files to the Desktop”. ///E-Z Pieces displays
the Add Files menu, which is illustrated in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3.
Add Files Menu
3. Choose an option from the Add Files menu.
lf you choose “Get files from the current disk”, / / / E-Z Pieces presents alist
of ///E-Z Pieces files on the disk. The names of the files are listed alphabet-
ically by type. Besides the filename, you see the size of the file in thousands
of characters, and the date (and time, if your Apple computer has a clock)
the file was last saved. The list can contain up to 150 filenames. If there are
2-8
TT TT W
Led
rn mh mh wh HY ©
i) tf)
ml
‘wi
bik titiik)C GB§e Ck) Gs a a a
more than ten files in the list, you see “more” at the bottom of the screen.
Press “DOWN-ARROW’ to see the rest of the list.
If you choose “Get files from a different disk”, /// E-Z Pieces asks you to
choose the location of the files. After you do, you get the list of ///E-Z
Pieces files for that disk.
If you choose any of the “Make a new file” options, / / / E-Z Pieces asks if you
want to make a file from scratch or from an existing file.
NOTE:
Specific directions for making new files are in
“Creating a Data Base File” in Chapter 4, “Creat-
ing a Document” in Chapter 7, and “Creating a
Worksheet” in Chapter 10.
ES
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Sometimes ///E-Z Pieces can’t find a disk in a
drive. Perhaps you haven't closed the door of the
disk drive, you inserted a disk that doesn’t have
///E-Z Pieces files on it, or the disk is in a
location other than the one displayed in the top-
left corner of the screen. When ///E-Z Pieces
cant find // / E-Z Pieces files in the disk drive, it
tells you so. You can check for the reason and
then ask / / / E-Z Pieces to look for the files again
in the same location or in a different location.
al a an
4. To choose one file from the list, use “DOWN-ARROW"” and “UP-
ARROW" to highlight the file you want. Then press “RETURN”.
5. Toselect several files, use “DOWN-ARROW’” and “RIGHT-ARROW”
to mark the files you want. Then press “RETURN”.
If you try to add a file that is already on the Desktop, // / E-Z Pieces asks if
you really want to do that. If you answer yes, / / / E-Z Pieces adds the second
copy of the file to the Desktop. (You may want to rename one of the two
copies.)
After ///E-Z Pieces adds two or more files at once to the Desktop, it
displays a message telling you how many files have been added. Now either
press “OPEN-APPLE”-Q” to get the Desktop Index or press the “SPACE”
bar to return to the “ADD FILES” menu.
2-9
By the Way: ///E-Z Pieces won't let you add files so that the number
on the Desktop exceeds 12. Neither will it let you add files that take up
more than the available Desktop space. ///E-Z Pieces displays a
message if you try to do either one.
The status of the file: whether it's new, changed, unchanged, or
saved.
di
The type of file: whether it was created by the Word Processor, the
Data Base, or the Spreadsheet.
Sal
Working With One of the Files on the Deskto
q p The size of the file, in thousands of characters.
To select one of the files on the Desktop to work with:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't,
you can get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Work with one of the files on the Desktop”. ///E-Z
Pieces displays the Desktop Index.
3. Choose the file you want to work with. ///E-Z Pieces dis-
plays that file with the cursor in the same place it was when
you last worked with the file, so you don't lose your place
when you leave a file.
Py
Nm ww mw
i i
eu/
lf there is only one file on the Desktop, /// E-Z Pieces displays that file
immediately, skipping the Desktop Index.
ze
NE _._ | | ee
///E-Z Pieces Tips
“OPEN-APPLE”-"“Q” gets you in the Desktop
Index from anywhere in /// E-Z Pieces.
sm j
Figure 2-4.
Save Files Menu
Saving Desktop Files to Disk
3. Use “DOWN-ARROW’” to choose the file you want to save. Then
press “return”. Or use “DOWN-ARROW’” and “RIGHT-ARROW?” to
highlight more than one filename. Then press “RETURN”.
4. What you do now depends on whether a file is new, changed,
unchanged, or saved:
— Ifthe file you designated is unchanged or saved, / / / E-Z Pieces
asks you if you want to put it on the current disk or on a different
disk or directory.
If you choose the current disk, you specify whether you want to
replace the old file with the new, unchanged file or save the file
with a different name. Then you type the new name of the file and
press “RETURN”.
— Ifthe file you designated is new or changed, / / / E-Z Pieces asks
you how to save the file. You can choose to save the file onto the
current disk or save the file onto a different disk or directory.
Then you have to specify the other disk or directory.
aml
Sometimes you want to save one or more files to disk but keep them on the
Desktop so you can continue to work with them. When you save a changed
file, / / / E-Z Pieces saves it to disk before it deletes the original file. That is, it
doesn’t just replace the old file with the changed file until it is successfully
saved. This is asafety measure to make sure you don't lose your original file
before the new one is saved. There must be enough room on the disk for
///€-Z Pieces to save the changed file.
Here’s how to save a file:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Save Desktop files to disk”. ///E-Z Pieces displays the
“SAVE FILES” menu, illustrated m Figure 2-4.
The last file you used is highlighted.
a rnaelUrhhCUmr
Les kd
2-10 2-11
Removing Files From the Desktop
When the Desktop is too full, you can remove files form the Desktop. When
you remove an unchanged file, you won't be asked first if you want to save it.
It is immediately removed.
NOTE:
See “Saving Desktop Files to Disk” to find out
how ///E-Z Pieces saves files.
To remove files from the Desktop:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Remove files from Desktop”. /// E-Z Pieces displays the
Remove Files menu, which is illustrated in Figure 2-5.
The status of the file: whether it’s new, changed, unchanged, or
saved.
The type of file: whether it was created by the Word Processor, the
Data Base, or the Spreadsheet.
The size of the file, in thousands of characters.
REMOVE FILES
Figure 2-5.
Remove Files Menu
2-12
mm Mm Wm Mm Wm Mm Mm Wm Hh WH
Wm hr Te OM
a at
(alu
sa
ai Lk
3. Use “DOWN-ARROW’ to highlight the file you want to remove. Then
press “RETURN”. Or use “DOWN-ARROW” and “RIGHT-ARROW"
to highlight more than one filename. Then press “RETURN”.
4. What you do now depends on whether a file is new, changed,
unchanged, or saved:
— Ifthe file you designated is unchanged or saved, /// E-Z Pieces
immediately removes it and displays the Remove Files menu
again.
— Ifthe file you designated is new or changed, you can choose from
these options:
— Remove the file and save it on the current disk;
— Change to another disk or directory, then save the file there;
— Throw out the file with its changes. Then///E-Z Pieces asks
you if you really want to permanently erase from the Desktop
the file you designated. This is a precautionary measure to
make sure you don’t erase a file by mistake.
If you change your mind and decide you don’t want to per-
manently erase the file, choose “No”. If you want to perman-
ently erase the file, choose “Yes”. ///E-Z Pieces takes you
back to the Main Menu.
Quitting / //E-Z Pieces
There are two ways to leave / / / E-Z Pieces. One is safer than the other! The
unsafe way is to just turn off your Apple computer. Or start up another
program. If you choose this method, you may lose information you should
have saved.
NOTE:
See “Saving Desktop Files to Disk” to find out
how ///E-Z Pieces saves files.
Here's the safe way to leave ///E-Z Pieces Pieces:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Quit”.
. Choose “Yes”. (“No” gives you a chance to change your mind.)
4. ///E-Z Pieces then asks you how to take care of all the new and
changed files on the Desktop, one by one. You can choose to
— Save files on the current disk
Go
2-13
— Change to a different disk or directory. Then you designate the
other disk or directory.
— Throw out the file. Then ///E-Z Pieces asks you if you really
want to throw out the file you designated. This is a precautionary
measure to make sure you don't erase a file by mistake.
If you have made a mistake and don’t want to throw out the file,
choose “No”. ///E-Z Pieces presents the three options again.
If you want to throw out the file, choose “Yes”. ///E-Z Pieces
asks you then how to take care of th next new or changed file on
the Desktop.
5. If a file is changed, ///E-Z Pieces asks you if you want to
replace the old file with the changed one or save It with a new
name. If you choose the second option, type the new name
and press “RETURN”.
WARNING
Using the Quit option to leave / / / E-Z Pieces ensures that you
will always at least think about saving new or changed files
before you quit using ///E-Z Pieces.
Using Other Activity Menu Options
This section tells how to use the options available from ///E-Z Pieces’
Other Activity Menu, including
— Changing the current disk drive or SOS prefix
— Lising all files on the current disk
— Creating a subdirectory
— Deleting files from disk
— Formatting a blank disk
— Selecting the standard location of the data disk
The last Other Activity Menu option, “Specify information about your prin-
ter(s)" is described in Chapter 13.
Changing the Current Disk Drive or SOS Prefix
When you want to make a temporary change to the location where /// E-Z
Pieces automatically looks for files, you can change to a different disk drive.
Or you can use a SOS prefix so ///E-Z Pieces looks in another location,
perhaps to a subdirectory on ProFile, for files. This change lasts until you
quit ///E-Z Pieces or until you change it again, whichever comes sooner.
2-14
rm mm
" mH oT
Ti
nn mm wa mh mh we mh ow
gsi tai tm Cm. aa, ea!
eel ie ee
ial
ai Lil
Anytime you change the standard location by using Other Activity Menu
option 6, the current location changes automatically to that value.
Here’s how to make the change:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
3. Choose “Change current disk drive or SOS prefix”. ///E-Z Pieces
displays the “CHANGE CURRENT DISK” menu.
4. Choose the device you want.
5. Type the SOS prefix if you chose “ProFile or other SOS directory”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces does not check the validity of
SOS prefixes when you change the current loca-
tion. If / / / E-Z Pieces can't find the location
when you ask for files or try to save files, it asks
you whether to try again or to try in a different
location.
i eee
NOTE:
See “File Locations” in Chapter 1 for a discus-
sion of current locations.
Listing Files on the Current Disk
‘It’s handy to be able to get a list of all files (up to 150) on the current disk, not
just ///E-Z Pieces files. Here's how:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don't, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
3. Choose “List all files on the current disk drive”. ///E-Z Pieces
displays the list, with // / E-Z Pieces files first and other files listed
alphabetically at the bottom designated as “Other” or “Subdirec-
tory”. If the list contains more than ten files, you see “more” atthe
bottom of the display. Use “‘DOWN-ARROW’” to see the rest of the
list. To see the list of files in a subdirectory, change the current SOS
prefix to include the subdirectory name.
4. Press “ESC” to return to the Other Activity Menu menu.
2-15
Creating a New Subdirectory
You can create a new subdirectory on the current disk or on ProFile. Here’s
how:
he
Go
Make sure you have the Main menu displayed. If you don’t, you can
get it by press “ESC” one or more times.
. Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
. Choose “Create a subdirectory”.
. Type the complete pathname of the subdirectory. Then press
“RETURN”. After // / E-Z Pieces creates the subdirectory, it reports
“Success”!
Deleting Files From the Disk
Here’s how to get rid of old files from your data disks or ProFile by deleting
files:
th
2.
3.
4.
Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. if you don’t, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
Choose “Delete files from disk”. / / / E-Z Pieces shows the “DELETE
FILES” display, which lists all files on the current disk.
Use “DOWN-ARROW"” to highlight the file you want to get rid of.
Then press “RETURN”. Or use “DOWN-ARROW” and “RIGHT-
ARROW” to mark more than one filename. Then press “RETURN”.
(Remember, you can unmark files with “LEFT-ARROW”.)
Then ///E-Z Pieces asks if you really want to erase the file you
designated. This is a precautionary measure to make sure you don’t
erase a file by mistake.
If you don't want to permanently erase the file, choose “No”. /// E-Z
Pieces takes you back to the Other Activity Menu menu or to the next
file you chose.
If you want to permanently erase the file, choose “Yes”. ///E-Z
Pieces takes you back to the “DELETE FILES” menu.
NOTE:
This activity also lets you delete a subdirectory if
it contains no files.
Formatting a Blank Disk
To format a blank disk for use as a/// E-Z Pieces data disk or for use with
other SOS systems:
2-16
mom oom
———_—— ..__....
mmm mae Omer
ami taj em) ea)
asi
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don’t, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
3. Choose “Format a blank disk”. ///E-Z Pieces asks you to type the
volume name for the disk. The volume name can contain up to 15
letters, numbers, and periods, with no spaces. It must begin with a
letter. Press “RETURN” after you have typed the name.
4. Make sure the disk is in the current drive. Press the “SPACE” bar
when you are ready to format.
After ///E-Z Pieces formats the disk it reports “Success!”
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Formatting a disk is a quick way of erasing all the
files on the disk.
Selecting the Standard Location of the Data Disk
The standard location of the data disk is where / / / E-Z Pieces looks for files
when you first start up and until you specify a current, different location.
This information is saved from one session to the next.
Here’s how to select the standard location:
1. Make sure you have the Main Menu displayed. If you don’t, you can
get it by pressing “ESC” one or more times.
2. Choose “Other Activity Menu”.
3. Choose “Change standard location of data disk”. ///E-Z Pieces
presents the Standard Data Disk display, which allows you to name a
disk drive or ProFile or other SOS directory as the standard location.
4. If you choose ProFile or other SOS directory, ///E-Z Pieces asks
you to type the SOS prefix. After you press “RETURN”, ///E-Z
Pieces displays the Other Activity Menu again.
When you change the standard location, the current location changes
automatically to the new standard location.
NOTE:
See “File Locations” in Chapter 1 for a discus-
sion of standard locations.
2-17
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Initially, the standard location for disks is Drive 1.
If you are using any other location for ///E-Z
Pieces data, select a new standard location.
Selecting the standard location is probably a
one-time only task.
Using Special Features
This section tells how to use ///E-Z Pieces’ special features including
— Asking for help
— Moving back and forth between files
— Saving the file you’re using
— Printing a copy of the screen display
— Keeping track of available Desktop space.
Asking for Help
Whenever “OA-? for Help” appears in the bottom right corner of the display,
you can get help information. To display help information:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“?”". ///E-Z Pieces displays the help in-
formation.
2. Use “DOWN-ARROW” and “UP-ARROW” to move the information
displayed so you can see all of it.
3. Press “ESC” to leave the help information and return to where you
were.
Moving Back and Forth Between Files
When you want to change to another file on the Desktop, press “OPEN-
APPLE’”-"Q” (for quick change). /// E-Z Pieces presents the Desktop Index,
from which you can choose the file you want. The Desktop Index is available
from anywhere in ///E-Z Pieces, so use it anytime to get to the file you
want. The file type is shown in abbreviated form after the filename.
Saving the File You’re Working On
Any time you want, you can save the file you’re working on at the moment.
To do so, press “OPEN-APPLE”-"S". ///E-Z Pieces saves the file imme-
diately on the current disk, replacing the original file by that name, if there is
2-18
rremmaem oma rm © om ow
mo om
‘wi
Vii
Z| Z| Z|
ta as iu.
ab Liki
one. As it saves the file, it displays the index cards that show the save
procedure. Then it returns you to the Review/Add/Change display of the
file. If you decide to stop this operation while it is still in progress, press
“ESC”. Your original file is still on the disk. This is probably the easiest and
fastest way to make sure you don’t lose information as you work with
///€E-Z Pieces.
Printing a Copy of the Display
To print a copy of what's displayed on the screen, press “OPEN-APPLE’-"H"
(for hard copy). Before you do, however, you should make sure the printer
designated for hard copies is the correct one.
NOTE:
See Chapter 13, “Printers and Printing,” for
directions on how to specify a printer to print a
copy of the display.
You can print a copy of the display any time you are using ///E-Z Pieces.
This feature can help you keep a written record of what Data Base report
formats and customized record layouts look like, and what printer options
are in effect.
Keeping Track of Available Desktop Space
Whenever you want, you can find out how much Desktop space is available
for files. To do so, you get the “Available Space” sign at the bottom-right
corner of the screen by pressing “OPEN-APPLE”-“?” whenever “OA-? for
Help” appears at the bottom right corner of the screen. The “Available
Space” sign tells how much space is available in thousands of characters, or
kilobytes (K).
The “Available Space” sign usually appears in the bottom-right corner of the
screen whenever “OA-? for Help” does not.
Ty
;
nm hm mh mH fH
Ln
im Cm) ali aa
tm
aml
Chapter 3
Understanding the Data Base
The Data Base’'s: TWO Malt) FUNCTIONS: sccc ons & ccc0 wee ecmes nce wecme 3-1
AGtiIVIty FIOW as xs os sae peewee sine scine oo Bea ere wiee. wee wie mere mene 3-2
File GUiIGGPIOS cae & 6a 6 oie de %oek a Saw CRS NOS CTT TIE es Orisa 3-3
///€-Z Pieces’ Data Base allows you to work with information you normally
keep in lists: names and addresses, schedules, inventories. The Data Base
makes it easy to organize the information, keep it current, and get copies of
it whenever you want.
This chapter discusses the Data Base’s two main functions, illustrates its
flow of activities, and lists its file guidelines.
The Data Base’s Two Main Functions
///€-Z Pieces’ Data Base performs two main functions, as Figure 3-1
illustrates. These two main functions are Review/Add/Change and Report.
DATA BASE
REVIEW/ADD/CHANGE REPORT
Figure 3-1.
Data Base’s Two Main Functions
When you use Review/Add/Change, you work with information in a file to
add new information, change incorrect information, and delete out-of-date
or unnecessary information. You also use features that allow you to display
only certain information, arrange records in the order you want them, and
change the way information is displayed on the screen.
When you work in Report, you create and print reports. To create reports,
you make a set of specifications that tell exactly what information you want
to print and the way you want the information placed. You also specify
calculations, subtotals, and grand totals.
The report specifications you make become part of the Data Base file but
they do not change the data in the file. You save the specifications so you
can print the report any time you want with current data.
As well as printing a report ona printer, you can “print” it to the clipboard for
inclusion in a Word Processor document or to the screen.
Activity Flow
Figure 3-2 shows your activities when you are using Data Base files.
Note:
The activities that lead to Review/Add/Change
and those included in Review/Add/Change are
described in Chapter 4. Those that have to do
with Report are described in Chapter 5.
DATA BASE
REPORT REVIEW/ADD/CHANGE
SELECT INFORMATION ADD NEW SEARCH FOR REPLACE
INFORMATION INFORMATION INFORMATION
DEFINE FORMATS
OUTPUT INFORMATION NEW NEW USE IT
CATEGORIES] | RECORDS
Figure 3-2.
Flowchart of Data Base Activities.
UPDATE IT DELETE IT
: ,
eM ee
_-/ ial.
igi
tal
yt il ltt hkl ast (tsi
File Guidelines
Review your understanding of Data Base terminology before studying the
Data Base file guidelines. Figure 3-3 illustrates asample Data Base file. The
numbers refer to the explanations of terminology that follow.
Flip-top Disk File
(
Figure 3-3.
Data Base Terminology
1. “Characters” are letter or numbers. “C” and “1”
are characters.
2. “Entries” are individual pieces of information
with?:1 a Data Base file. “Courier 10 Printwheel”
and “FF3882" are entries.
3. “Categories” are one kind of information within a
Data Base file. “Item”, “Item No.”, and “Cost” are
categories.
4. “Records” are all the information about one per-
son or item in the file. All the information about
the Flexible Disk Binder is in one record.
Table 3-1 lists guidelines for Data Base files.
File Feature Guideline
Maximum number of records
in a file assuming an average
record size of 75 characters.
About 625 maximum
About 2300 maximum
Maximum number of cate- 30
gories per record
Maximum length of a record 1024 characters maximum
Maximum length of an entry 79 characters maximum
Maximum number of char- 20
acters in a category name
Table 3-1.
Data Base File Guidelines
3-4
Apple /// with 128K RAM:
Apple /// with 256K RAM:
mmm Ff PR
i
a ma) emi am) am)
emi
‘ai oka
Chapter 4
Working With Data Base Information
Creatiria a Date Base File: cas cag scow mw sws ey easees nda oe iawn 4-2
Planning a New Data Base File. ........ 00. ee cere cee een eeeees 4-2
Creating Te Files was cies deat wiedensaew.dqd ene COORD 1S REE ew 4-3
POP SSID: o/c + nied eh aiid aed SEE Oe Ieee 4-3
From a Text (ASCII) FHC sccsnse cow wow rae view enw wht twee 4-4
Fro DIP Pil@es soy criaccca dpe tad eedises oyievsshowweesawes 4-5
From a Quick Fil6 Fil@ cscs cvs ssw cae ven cea cwe cae Cas ews 4-6
Multiple and Single Record Formats ..........se ee eeeeee een eee eens 4-6
InSertING RECOM Six. nac cnc cec ened 104 6001 SCRDTRD EON EM ebOad Te HM 4-7
Resords irito-a: Ne Files oscccwed sears ihe nee encores eed 4-7
Records Intovan: Existing Ful ssdsca dens cne vd eed can werner wees 4-8
In Single-Record Layout cass coves cwwwwswws cee eden cower 4-8
hi Multinie-Record Layout as. ccavias sas caw cescus oseiesiwa ses 4-9
Putting Information Into EntrieS ......6c cess cece eee erence een enaee 4-9
Typing and Editing EntrieS .....0 ses eek este eweees seed tee cus 4-10
Deis EER cc nsracndeiaunnionesaencer newer ca AAR RS 4-10
Using Standard Values si40.nirewcsaw asa ede ame ee eane eRe eRe Obs 4-10
Usirig Datesand THCSs ais sis 0 scenes sarsints mae wos eek eo ee 4-11
Movinid the CUPsO8 as ¢.504 0 coe cae coed eas Kets e neues eeuwewe ens 4-13
Cursor Movement In Multiple-and Single-Record Layout ....... 4-14
Cursor Movement In Multiple-Record Layout..............+56. 4-14
Cursor Movement In Single-Record Layout ...........--eeeee 4-15
DiSlelid ROCOMIS onic: schon e ey et abie enw Stine td waded RR OR 4-15
COpying RECORS « bas cise cae cine cee mee mee nee hier eae Rae eee oR 4-17
Copying One Record «21s cewiwensiase ceacey eawew dead nme ees 4-17
Copying Groups of RECOIdS os vss isu cud suis cen ce eam neeewe eas 4-17
MOVING RECOMS: «4 .sia5.c65- crs 26K sigs ESR 5165 F504 BO FOR Hee as OOS PONTO; 4-18
Displaying Certain ROCOrdS .... 200 ook isles ioe cat naie 68 oe ee eee do's 4-18
Changing Record Selection Rules .........6eseeeeeeee eee eeens 4-18
Finding Certain Records: «.. 60.2 0006 senses. eens 9 nae Hees 6 004 4-19
Deleting Certain RECOrds ...... 2.00 cc cece cece e erence erence neneens 4-20
Arranging ROCOrdS 66008 ccvves wis Kote owe canieanas Hie E84 eee ea 4-20
Zooming Ih Gnd OWE ose cas. cen ewe susie. pen cota ees HOR wes wid on Hore 4-21
Changing the Record Layout a. ..0 seme sie waisted n9t oe vise Hee oe ams 4-21
Changing the Multiple-Record Layout ...........eee cece eens 4-22
Changing the Single-Record LayOut.......... cee een cece eenes 4-23
Changing @ File’s Structures ecics.x1es dantnwtersier eee cere RES 4-24
The activities described in this chapter allow you to create Data Base files,
browse through them, and keep information current. They also let you
control what information is displayed and how it’s displayed.
Creating a Data Base File
This section tells how to plan a new Data Base file and how to create a Data
Base file from scratch, from a text (ASCII) file, from a DIF file, and from a
Quick File file.
Planning a New Data Base File
When you plan a Data Base file, you first decide in general what the file
should contain. That is, similar items of information logically belong
together in a file. For example, your index of baseball cards belongs in one
file, while your list of office inventory items belongs in another.
After you decide in general what the file should contain, you should analyze
exactly what the similar items of information in the file have in common. For
example, the items in the office inventory file probably have the following
information in common: name of inventory article, date it was bought,
where it was bought, original price, depreciated value, and warranty infor-
mation. These become the categories in the file.
Each office item has a record in the file. For example, your copy machine
and your answering machine each have records.
So the file looks like that illustrated in Figure 4-1.
DeprecVal Price
Copy Mach. 2299 95
157.95
Answering Mach. Nov iS 68
Figure 4-1.
Office Inventory File
reer /!
mm oT
‘vi
i“ tl
Creating the File
Follow these steps to create the file:
1. Choose “Add files to the Desktop” from the Main Menu.
2. Choose “Make a new file for the Data Base” from the Add Files menu.
3. Choose “From scratch”, “Froma text (ASCII) file”, or “From a Quick
File file’, or “From a DIF file” from the Data Base menu.
From Scratch
Follow these steps if you're creating your file from scratch:
1. Type the name of the new file in response to “Type a name for this
new file”. Filenames can be up to 15 characters long. They must
begin with a letter, and they can contain uppercase or lowercase
letters, numbers, periods, and spaces. Then press “RETURN”,
2. Type the names of the categories in the file. Category names can be
up to 20 characters long. Press “RETURN” after each, including the
last.
3. Press “ESC” when you are satisfied with the filename and the cate-
gory names. ///E-Z Pieces then tells you the file doesn’t contain
any information and that you can begin inserting new records by
pressing the “SPACE” bar. The section “Inserting Records Into a
New File” tells how to continue.
Tocorrect the filename, press “UP-ARROW’" to return to the filename. Then
retype it and press “RETURN”.
To correct category names:
— Press “UP-ARROW’ to go to the previous category name.
— Press “DOWN-ARROW’” to go to the next category name.
— Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“I” to insert a category name ahead of the one
the cursor is on.
— Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"D” to delete a category name. Then correct
the category name and press “RETURN”.
4-3
ee
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Use the category names that contain the words
“date” and “time”, such as “Birthdate” or “arrival
time”. Then ///E-Z Pieces converts entries in
that category to standard date and time format.
It’s easy to change a file’s structure after you
create it, and even after you create records for
the file.
i aL
NOTES:
See “Using Dates and Times” in this chapter for
more information about standard dates and
times.
See “Changing a File’s Structure” in this chapter
for more information about how to change the
structure of a file.
From a Text (ASCII) File
You can use a text (ASCII) file as the source of your /// E-Z Pieces Data
Base file. Text files are files created by systems such as the Apple Pascal
Editor when the environment is set to ASCII, Apple Writer, and some data
base systems.
///€-Z Pieces requires that
— Each entry in the file be on a separate line and followed by a carriage
return.
— Entries be grouped by record and in the same order throughout the
file.
Follow these steps to make a Data Base file from a text file:
1. If you chose “From a text (ASCI!) file’, // / E-Z Pieces asks for the
text file’s pathname. Type the complete pathname and press
“RETURN”.
2. Type the number of categories each record will have and press
“RETURN”.
3. Type the///E-Z Pieces name for the file. Filenames can be up to 15
characters long. They must begin with a letter, and they can contain
uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and spaces.
Then press “RETURN”.
mrrtrFnentrmrFEerTeFe nt WwW
eal
— — os —_— eee ee ————— — - -——t — —_ —- ——__ —— oS — BO —- oe -_ oe! an ere — lO
— =
ce mm Mm
‘ .
* !
|
[EF
aa aa aad
ff
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed briefly in Chapter 1 of
this manual and in the Apple /// Owner's
Manual”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you first get the text file, categories are
named “Category 1” and so on. You can change
the categories’ names with the “OPEN-APPLE’-
“N" command.
From a DIF File
You can use a DIF file—a file created by ///E-Z Pieces’ Spreadsheet,
VisiCalc, and other programs—as the source of a Data Base file. When you
first create the DIF file, however, use the “C”, or “column-wise” option. Then
all information for one record is automatically grouped together.
Follow these steps to make a Data Base file from a DIF file:
1. If you chose “From a DIF file” ///E-Z Pieces asks for the file’s
pathname. Type the complete pathname and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the/// E-Z Pieces name for the file. Filenames can be up to 15
characters long. They must begin with a letter, and they can contain
uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and spaces.
Then press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed briefly in Chapter 1 of
this manual and in the “Apple /// Owner's
Manual”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you first get the text file, categories are
named “Category 1” and so on. You can change
the categories’ names with the “OPEN-APPLE’-
“N” command.
From a Quick File File
You can use a Quick File file as the source of a/ / / E-Z Pieces Data Base file,
too. Here’s how:
1. If you choose Froma Quick File file” / / / E-Z Pieces get the Quick
File file catalog from the disk in the current drive. After you select the
Quick File file you want, / / / E-Z Pieces adds it to the Desktop, and
you're on your way.
Multiple- and Single-Record Formats
///€-Z Pieces displays information contained in its data base files in either
“multiple-” or “single-record formats”. In multiple-record format, /// E-Z
Pieces displays 15 records, line after line. As you can guess, single-record
format displays only a single record ata time.
To get from multiple-record to single-record format, you “zoom in,” and get
from single-record format to multiple-record format you “zoom out”. This is
accomplished with the “OPEN-APPLE”-"Z" command as follows:
1. Place the cursor on the first character of the record you wish to zoom
into.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"2".
You may return to multiple-record format simply by pressing “OPEN-
APPLE”-“Z” again. When you zoom back out to multiple-record format, the
cursor is always on the same record as it was on in single-record format.
Single-record format generally allows you to see more information about
individual records, and is useful for showing or adding information not seen
in the multiple-record format.
NOTE:
See more information about single-and multiple-
record layouts in the sections on “Inserting
Records”, “Moving the Cursor”, and “Changing
the Record Layout” in this chapter.
4-6
1 iis
=
ri
s“ Srnntem twee rh Ww
Inserting Records
You can insert records into a new file or into an existing file in single-record
layout. This section tells how.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Use standard values to put the same information
into every entry in most or all records.
NOTE:
See “Using Standard Values” in this chapter.
Records Into a New File
After you create a new Data Base file, you can insert records into the file.
Follow these steps:
1. Press “ESC” after you set up the filename and the category names.
///€-Z Pieces tells you there are no records in the file and that you
should press the “SPACE” bar to begin inserting records.
2. Press the “SPACE” bar. ///E-Z Pieces presents the first blank
record in single-record layout.
3. Type information for each entry and press “RETURN”. Or just press
“RETURN” if the entry is blank. When you press “RETURN” after the
last entry in the first record, /// E-Z Pieces presents the second
blank record. Continue to create records until you are through.
4. Press “ESC” after you finish creating new records. ///E-Z Pieces
presents the new records displayed in multiple-record layout.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can make the information in an entry long
enough so that it fits in the space next to the
category name. Actually, an entry can be up to
79 characters long, almost the width of the
screen in single-record layout. You may not be
able to see the whole entry in multiple-record
layout, however, unless you change the multiple-
record layout with “OPEN-APPLE’-“L”.
NOTE:
See “Changing the Record Layout.”
Records Into an Existing File
You can insert records into an existing file from Review/Add/Change
multiple-or single-record layout.
In Single-Record Layout
Here’s how to insert records when you're in single-record layout:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“!”./// E-Z Pieces presents a blank record in
single-record layout. Type information into entries and press
“RETURN” after each.
2. Press “RETURN” after you type information into the last entry in the
first blank record. /// E-Z Pieces presents the second blank record.
3. Continue to create new records until you are through. Press
“RETURN” after the last entry in the last new record. Then press
“ESC”. ///E-Z Pieces returns you to the place in Review/Add/-
Change where you were when you pressed “OPEN-APPLE”-“1”,
New records go immediately “before” the record the cursor is on when you
press “OPEN-APPLE’-"l". Then you can arrange records in the order you
want them.
NOTE:
See “Arranging Records.”
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Pressing “ESC” while you are inserting records
always returns you to the place Review/Add/-
Change where you were when you began to
insert records. If you were in single-record
layout before you began inserting, you will
return to single-record layout when you press
“ESC”. Then press “OPEN-APPLE”-"Z” to zoom
out to multiple-record layout.
You can insert new records at the end of a file,
too. Move the cursor to the last record in the file.
Then, if you have to, go into multiple-record
format by pressing “OPEN-APPLE’-“Z” to zoom
into the record. Press “DOWN-ARROW’” to get
past the last entry in this record. / / / E-Z Pieces
asks you if you want to insert new records.
Choose “Yes”. ///E-Z Pieces presents a blank
record.
mrmmiemiemtememmmHmmmmHm mmr YT
a o i =
;
Changing the single-record layout, by pressing
“OPEN-APPLE”-“L”, makes it easier to add re-
cords because you can display categories and
type in information in the same order and layout
as your Oata input forms.
In Multiple-Record Layout
You can insert records in multiple-record layout, too, although you should
make sure you get information into entries not displayed in this layout. To
insert records in multiple-record layout, you first create blank records and
then type information into them:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"l” when you are in multiple-record layout.
///€E-Z Pieces displays a record in single-record layout.
2. Press “RETURN” to create blank entries in the record. Stop when the
cursor is on the first entry in the second record.
3. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"Z” to return to multiple-record layout.
4. Use “OPEN-APPLE’-“C” to make multiple copies of the blank
record.
NOTE:
See “Copying Records”.
5. Whenever you want, type information into the blank entries. Press
“RETURN” after each new entry. If you use the insert cursor, long
entries slide to the right and under the next category entry, so entries
are not limited in length by the category’s column width.
lf you are going to type information into entries in multiple-record layout,
you may want to set the cursor so that it moves to the right instead of down
when you press “RETURN”. Todo this, type “OPEN-APPLE”-"L”, then press
“ESC”, and choose “Right”.
Putting Information Into entries
It’s easy to type information into Data Base entries and then edit any thatare
incorrect. In addition, you can use special Data Base features that allow you
to get information into entries easily, with a minimum of typing and correct-
ing errors!
Typing and Editing Entries
Here’s how to add or edit information in your Data Base entries:
1. Use the insert cursor, which is the blinking bar cursor, or the over-
strike cursor, which is the blinking square cursor, when you are
typing and editing entries. Anything you type with the overstrike
cursor replaces what was there. Anything you type with the insert
cursor goes to the left of the character the cursor is on. The character
the cursor is on and information to the right of it moves to the right.
Change between cursors with “OPEN-APPLE”-“E”.
2. Use “DELETE” to delete one character to the left of the cursor.
3. Press “ESC” to restore the former entry and move the cursor to the
first character of the entry.
4. Use “LEFT-ARROW” and “RIGHT-ARROW’” to move the cursor past
characters, without changing them.
5. Press “CONTROL-Y” to erase the rest of an entry starting from
where the cursor is. Pressing “RETURN” in the middle of an existing
entry does not truncate the rest of the entry.
6. Use the insert cursor to insert characters into entries in the multiple-
record layout. If the entry becomes too long for the available space,
the information to the right of the cursor slides under the entry in the
next column. You can zoom in to see the whole entry.
Dittoing Entries
In multiple-record format you can ditto, or copy, the entry above the one the
cursor is on into the current entry just by pressing “OPEN-APPLE”-
“(quote)” (do not press “SHIFT”). Use the ditto feature in multiple-record
layout.
Using Standard Values
Standard values are values you create that /// E-Z Pieces automatically
inserts in Data Base records. After you create a standard value for a cate-
gory, each entry in that category when you are inserting records gets the
standard value until you enter a different value for it. Standard values save
you time because you don’t have to retype the same information again and
again and correct mistakes along the way when you are inserting many
records with similar data.
4-10
mm i
rm)
‘ws
i
a
For example, when many people in your name and address file live in the
same city, say, Chicago, the you would make Chicago the standard value for
the city category. Chicago is the entry for the city category for each new
record and you change the entry only for the ones who “don’t” live in
Chicago.
Here’s how to create standard values:
1. Make sure you are in Review/Add/Change or Insert New Records
(“OPEN-APPLE”-“1”).
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“V”. ///E-Z Pieces presents a record with
- the standard values for categories that have them.
3. Type a standard value for a category. Then press “RETURN”. Type
standard values for other categories if necessary.
4. Press “ESC” to return to Review/Add/Change or Insert New
Records.
Whenever you insert records, categories with standard values are already
filled in. You can leave the standard value or type information over it to
change it.
To remove a standard value, start from Review/Add/Change or Insert New
Records. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“V”. Put the cursor on the category whose
standard value you want to remove. Press “CONTROL”-“Y” and then
“RETURN”. The standard value is removed.
Press “ESC” to return to Review/Add/Change or Insert New Records.
Using Dates and Times
///E-Z Pieces converts dates you type to a standard format if you make
sure the category name contains the word “date”, as in “Date”, “Expiration
Date”, “Date of Hire”. That is, all dates appear as three-letter months, one-or
two-digit days, and two-digit years. Examples are Sep 4 83 and Nov 24 83.
///€-Z Pieces can easily arrange the records in a file by date when you use
the Arrange feature if dates are in this standard format. Table 4-1 shows
some date entries that have been converted to standard format. They have
already been arranged by date.
4-11
When You Enter:
///E-Z Pieces Converts It To:
May 3 May 3
5.3.71 May 3 71
3 83 Mar 83
6April83 Apr 6 83
May 1983 May 83
May 7, 1983 May 7 83
5-10-84 May 10 84
5/12/83 May 12 83
June 83 Jun 83
Table 4-1.
Dates Converted to Standard Format
Likewise, whever a category name contains the word “time”, as in “Time”, or
“StartTime”, or “TIME”, /// E-Z Pieces converts the times you enter to a
standard format. Because / / / E-Z Pieces is attuned to the business day, it
assumes all times you enter to be within the business day without your
having to enter the a.m. or the p.m. Table 4-2 shows some sample time
conversions.
When You Enter: ///€-Z Pieces Converts It To:
700 7:00 AM
1 1:00 PM
7 7:00 AM
12 12:00 PM
3 3:00 PM
659 6:59 PM
To enter a time and not to have it be considered a part of the business day,
ss se os
you should enter an “a” ora “p”.
4-12
mm mM!
ri
am aa aai sai igi Ea es] ea
eal
When You Enter: ///E-Z Pieces Converts It To:
7por/p 7:00 PM
12a 12:00 AM
3a 3:00 AM
659 a 6:59 AM
Table 4-2.
Times Converted to Standard Format
When you don'’tenter the day, month, or year, / / / E-Z Pieces automatically
considers the entry as “00”, and leaves that part of the entry blank. That’s
why, if you were to order records by date using the Arrange feature, “Mar 83”
would follow “May 3”. To /// E-Z Pieces they are “May 3 00” and “Mar 00
83”.
The following dates won't be converted:
0 42783
42783
27 483
Ap
///€-Z Pieces converts 24-hour time to 12-hour time. Thus, when you enter
“1300”, /// E-Z Pieces converts it to “1:00 PM”. When you enter “0001”,
///€-Z Pieces converts it to “12:01 AM”.
lf you don’t want dates or times converted, don’t include “date” or “time” in
the category name.
Moving the Cursor
The cursor movement keystrokes that are the same whether you are in
multiple-record or single-record layout are listed in the first section. The
ones that are specific to multiple-record layout are listed next, and then
those specific to single-record layout.
4-13
Cursor Movement In Multiple- and Single-Record Layout
What You Want
Move cursor to next entry
Move the cursor to previous entry
Move the cursor to the right
within an entry
Move the cursor to the left within
an entry
Use /// E-Z Pieces’ Ruler to move
the cursor proportionally through
a file
Move cursor down one category
Move cursor up one category
NOTE:
What You Use
“TAB” when the cursor is on the
first character of any entry.
“OPEN-APPLE”-“TAB” when the
cursor is on the first character of
an entry
“RIGHT-ARROW”
“LEFT-ARROW”
“OPEN-APPLE”-"1” thru “9”
“DOWN-ARROW” when cursor is
on the first character of an entry
“UP-ARROW” when cursor is on
the first character of an entry.
See ‘Using ///E-Z Pieces’ Ruler” in Chapter 2
for a discussion of how the Ruler works.
Cursor Movement In Multiple-Record Layout
What You Want
Move the cursor to the top of the
display and then to the top of the
previous screenful, or “page”, of
records
What You Use
“OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW”
To move quickly toward the
beginning of a long file, screenful
by screenful, hold down:
“OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW”,
4-14
™m om om
"PY ee ee Ss oe ello
geil eoai ta / ie
al
ia] ia,
“9 “#
ial i!
aa
ia|
ae lel
Move the cursor to the bottom of
the display and then to the bot-
tom of the text screenful, or
“nage”, of records “OPEN-APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW”
To move quickly toward the end
of a long file, screenful by screen-
ful, hold down:
“OPEN-APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW"”.
Change the direction the cursor
moves when you press “RETURN”. “OPEN-APPLE”-“L” then “ESC”
Choose the direction in which the
cursor should go.
Cursor Movement In Single-Record Layout
What You Want
“DOWN-ARROW?”, “TAB”, or
“RETURN” when the cursor is on
the first character in an entry
What You Want
Move the cursor to the next entry
Move the cursor to the previous
entry “UP-ARROW” when the cursor is
on the first character in an entry
Display the next record in a file,
leaving the cursor in the same
category “OPEN-APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW"”
Display the previous record in a
file, leaving the cursor in the same
category “OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW”
Deleting Records
To delete one or more records in multiple-record layout:
1. Put the cursor on a record you want to delete.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D”. // / E-Z Pieces highlights the record the
cursor is on.
4-15
3. Use the arrow keys to highlight the other records you want to delete.
After you highlight a record in multiple-record layout, you can use
///€-Z Pieces’ cursor movement keystrokes to highlight more
records. You can use “OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW” or “OPEN-
APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW” and the Ruler.
4. Press “RETURN”.
To delete one or more records in single-record layout:
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“Z” to zoom in to single-record layout.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"“D”,
. Choose “No” or “Yes” depending on whether you want to delete the
record displayed.
. Continue to choose “No” or “Yes” as /// E-Z Pieces displays suc-
ceeding records.
. Press “ESC” after you finish deleting.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Choose specific records to delete by using the
Data Base’s find feature or by creating a record
selection rule (“OPEN-APPLE”-“R”). Then use
“OPEN-APPLE” “D” for these records.
You can delete all the information in a file but
keep its structure. Here’s how: First, create a
blank record as the first record in the file.
Second, move the cursor to the second record.
Third, press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D”. Then press
“OPEN-APPLE”-"9” and “RETURN”. All but the
first record are deleted. (You can’t delete every
record in a file.) Now add new information.
NOTE:
See “Displaying Certain Records” for informa-
tion about the find feature and using record
selection rules.
4-16
reenmrtmwtnthm wm war he
mmm Om
Ti
Copying Records
You can copy one record one or more times, or you can copy a group of
records.
Copying One Record
You can make one or more copies of a record in a Data Base file. For
example, if many of your records have the same entries, you can make a
number of copies of the record and then change the entries that are unique.
You can make copies of a record from Review/Add/Change multi-record or
single-record layout. Here’s how:
1. Put the cursor on an entry in the record you want to make one or
more copies of.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“C”.
3. If you are in multiple-record layout, choose “Current record”.
4. Type the number of copies you want and press “RETURN”.
Copying Groups of Records
When you copy groups of records, you use// / E-Z Pieces’ clipboard to hold
the records temporarily. The clipboard is used for cutting and pasting
information. To make one or more copies of a group of records:
1. Make sure you are in multiple-record layout.
. Place the cursor on the first record of the group to be copied.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“C”.
. Choose “To clipboard (cut)”.
. Use the arrow keys to highlight the records you want to copy.
. Press “RETURN”. The records are copied to the clipboard.
~J *O O1 > Go NO
. Move the cursor to the place in the file where you want the copied
records to go.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“C”.
Co
9. Choose “From clipboard (paste)”. The records are immediately
copied from the clipboard.
Moving Records
When you move groups of records, you use /// E-Z Pieces’ clipboard to
hold the records temporarily. The clipboard is used for cutting and pasting
information. To move a group of records:
1. Make sure you are in multiple-record layout.
. Place the cursor on the first record of the group to be moved.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“M”,
. Choose “To clipboard (cut)”.
. Use the arrow keys to highlight the records you want to move.
. Press “RETURN”. The records are moved to the clipboard.
~~ OO Oo F&F WD NO
. Move the cursor to the place in the file where you want the records to
rt
go.
ress “OPEN-APPLE”-"M”.
oO
9, Choose “From ciipboard (paste)”. The records are immediately
moved from the clipboard.
Displaying Certain Records
By changing record seleciion rules or using the Find command, you can
display only certain records from the file. You can then use other Data Base
features with these records, such as Delete, Arrange, and Cut and Paste.
Changing Record Selection Rules
When you first create a file, the record selection rule is “Selection: All
records”. Thus, ali records are displayed. You can change record selection
rules so only records that meet the rule you specify are displayed.
To change the record selection rule:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"“R”.
2. Choose the category you want to use as a basis for the selection.
You can use any category, even one not displayed in the file’s
muiltipie-record layout.
3. Choose a comparison.
4-18
- om om”
‘we
mm mm meeeeemrmhOm mh lUrmrlUrhrlrelOh
ii
4. Type the value each entry iri the specified category should be com-
pared with (unless your choice is “is blank” or “is not blank” in step
3). Then press “RETURN”.
5. Press “ESC” if your record selection rule is complete. / / / E-Z Pieces
displays all the records that meet the rule.
Or choose a connector: “and, or, through”. Then make up another
record selection rule.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can construct a record selection rule with
one or two connectors.
Thus, you can display the records of all baseball
players in your file who play for the Houston
Astros “and” make over $75,000.00 a year. Or
you can display the records of those who batting
average is over .300 “or” who drink Lite beer.
When you want to go back to “Selection: All records”:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“R”.
2. Choose “Yes” to indicate that you want to display al! records.
///E-Z Pieces displays all records again.
Finding Certain Records
You can ask /// E-Z Pieces to find all records that contain information you
specify. The information may be in any category in a record and anywhere
within an entry.
To find certain records:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“F”,
2. Type the value you want /// E-Z Pieces to look for. /// E-Z Pieces
displays the records that contain the value you provide.
3. Press “ESC” io return to Review/Add/Change.
4-19
///E-Z Pieces Tips
The Find feature gives you a lot of flexibility in
locating records because ///E-Z Pieces finds
the records that contain the value regardless of
where the value is. If you ask /// E-Z Pieces to
find all records that contain “ace”, it will display
the following two:
Last Name First Name Off. Phone Company Title
408-174-3948 County DA
PlaceOfc
Bradshaw Horace
Wilford Winnifred 408-555-2938 Secretemps
On the other hand, by providing record selection
rules (“OPEN-APPLE”-“R”) that tell / / / E-Z Pie-
ces what to look for, you can be much more
specific, because you can say exactly what cate-
gory the value you provide should be found in.
To get Bradshaw's record only, for example, you
would have to make a Record Selection Rule
such as “First Name equals Horace”.
Deleting Certain Records
You can set up record selection rules or find certain records that you want to
delete. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"D” to delete the records.
Arranging Records
///€-Z Pieces lets you arrange, or sort, records by the values of entries
within a category. You can arrange records in alphabetical order from “A” to
“Z” or “Z’” to “A”, orin numeric order from “0” to “9” or “9” to “0”. And you can
arrange records with standard dates or times in chronological or reversed
chronological order.
To arrange records:
1. Move the cursor to any entry in the category by which you want your
records arranged.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"A".
3. Choose the way you want the records arranged.
4-20
‘we
To arrange by any number of categories: first arrange by the values in the
less important category and then arrange by the values in the more impor-
tant category.
Zooming In and Out
“Zooming in” means changing from multiple-record layout, and “zooming
out” means changing from single-to multiple-record layout. You can usually
see a complete entry in single-record layout, when you may be able to see
only part of it in multiple-record layout.
To change from multiple-to single record layout or vice versa:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"2”:
After you move from one layout to the other, you can move about through
records by using the cursor movement keystrokes allowable in that layout.
Changing the Record Layout
You can customize screen displays by changing the multiple-to single-
record layout so that records are displayed exactly the way you want them.
For example, you can lengthen or shorten columns or rearrange them to suit
your needs. Changing the record layout does not change the file, only the
way information is displayed.
WARNING
When you change afile’s structure by deleting or
inserting a category, you lose all customized
record layouts.
4-21
Changing the Multiple-Record Layout
Follow these steps to change the multi-record layout:
1. Make sure you are in multiple-record layout.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"L”. /// E-Z Pieces displays your options on
top and three sample records on the bottom. The records are exam-
ples of how the file will look after you make your changes.
3. Change the record layout, choosing from the following options:
What You Want
Move the cursor to the next
category
Move the cursor to the previous
category
Switch the position of the cate-
gory the cursor is on with the one
on its right
Switch the position of the cate-
gory the cursor is on with the one
on its left
Increase the width of the column
the cursor is on
Decrease the width of the column
the cursor is on
Delete the category the cursor is
on from the multiple-record dis-
play. The information in this cate-
gory stays in the record and con-
iinues to appear when you
display the record in single-
record layout.
What You Use
“RIGHT-ARROW” or “TAB”
“LEFT-ARROW” or
“OPEN-APPLE”-"“TAB”
“OPEN-APPLE”-‘>” (You don't
need to use “SHIFT” for “>”.)
“OPEN-APPLE”-"“<” (Again, no
“SHIFT” required)
“OPEN-APPLE”-"“RIGHT-ARROW”
“OPEN-APPLE”-"LEFT-ARROW”
“OPEN-APPLE’-"D”
4-22
-_ —. |
ie
- —_ - A &
— &
™
7. ~!
'
i,
am / a mt
fai
eal
al
ie) olka eas ase aed
ve
Insert a previously deleted cate-
gory just to the left of the cate-
gory the cursor is on “OPEN-APPLE”-"1”
After you type
“OPEN-APPLE”-“l”, a list of pre-
viously delted categories is dis-
olayed. Type the number of the
category you want to reinsert and
press “RETURN”.
4. After youchange the record layout so that the records are displayed
the way you want them, press “ESC’.
5. Choose the way you want the cursor to go when you press
“RETURN” in Review/Add/Change multiple-record layout.
You will probably want to use all the above options until you see "MARGIN"
appear on the right side of the screen. This ensures that the width of the
records will fit on the Review/Add/Change screen.
Changing the Single-Record Layout
A customized single-record layout often makes it easier to insert records
into the file, because you can arrange categories to maich the layout of your
input forms. When you change the single-record layout, you just move
categories around each other. Here's how:
1. Zoom into single-record layout with “OPEN-APPLE”-"Z".
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“L”. /// E-Z Pieces displays the “CHANGE
RECORD LAYOUT” screen, which looks like a record in single-
record layout.
3. Changing the single-record layout invoives putting the cursor on the
first letter of the name of the category whose position you want to
change, and then moving the category.
What You Want What You Do
Press:
“_EFT-ARROW”,
“RIGHT-ARROW"”,
“UP-ARROW”,
“DOWN-ARROW", or
“RETURN”.
TO move the cursor
4-23
To move categories Press:
“OPEN-APPLE”-“LEFT-ARROW”,
“OPEN-APPLE”-“RIGHT-ARROW”,
“OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW”, or
“OPEN-APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW”
4. Press “ESC” after you have customized the single-record layout.
Changing a File’s Structure
///€-Z Pieces lets you change the name of your Data Base file or the names
of the categories in it. It also lets you change the structure of the file itself:
you can add new categories at any time and delete categories you no longer
need.
Suppose you have a Data Base file for every company you do business with.
You keep reports of contacts with that company in the file: Date; Time,
Name of Contact, Comments. After working with the file for a while, you
decide you need another category, Follow Up, which will remind you of how
you are supposed to follow up on the contact. It’s easy to add this new
category to your Data Base file.
The ability to change your Data Base files’ structures is invaluable. You can’t
always know ahead of time exactly how a file should be put together. So you
can learn from your experience, and easily make required changes.
WARNING
Change to the filename or category names have
no impact on customized record layouts and
report formats. But inserted or deleted catego-
ries do. That is, whenever you delete a category
you lose your customized record layouts and
your report formats.
4-24
gai taj eal ani i mt /
igi
ms oles OL
It's to your benefit to change the file structure if you really want to add or
delete categories and then recreate special record layouts and report for-
mats. You may want to make a copy of record layouts and report formats by
using “OPEN-APPLE”-“H” (for hard copy). Then they're easy to recreate.
Here's how to change the way a file is put together:
1. Make sure you are in Review/Add/Change for the file you want to
change.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"“N”. /// E-Z Pieces presents the “CHANGE
NAME/CATEGORY’ display, with the cursor at the bottom with the
prompt “Type filename”.
3. Type the new file name and press “RETURN”. Just press “RETURN”
if you don’t want to change it.
4. Use the following cursor movement keystrokes and special keys to
fix the file:
What You Want What You Do
Move cursor to previous or next
category Press “UP-ARROW” or
“DOWN-ARROW”.
Put the cursor on the category
name you want to change.
Change a category name
Use editing features to change
the name of the category and
press “RETURN”.
Put the cursor where you want
the new category.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“I”
Insert a new category
Answer “Yes” to the questions
whether you really want to set the
custom record layouts back to
standard.
Type in the name of the new
category and press “RETURN”.
4-25
Delete a category Put the cursor on the category
you want to delete.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"D”.
Answer “Yes” to the question
whether you really want to set the
custom record layouts back to
standard.
5. Press “ESC” after you finish fixing the file.
NOTE:
See “Putting Information Into Entries” for instructions on how to use
editing features.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
If you add new categories, you probably will
want to insert information into those categories.
lf the entries are short, you may find it easy to
insert in multiple-record layout with the cursor
going down after you press “RETURN”. Then
you can easily go from one record to another,
inserting new information in each.
4-26
wi
—_!
- ae
bd
Chapter 5
Reporting With the Data Base
REDO SIYIES: os con cae wes Hes wes eaese com Cwm Ene Kom Coe heels Rive RIOT Bene 5-2
REDOrt FOMAISs 65 wes ces des cee ware Haw tw KON Kole One Kom HOE ROK OOD BOM 5-3
RBOOt MOU cas oss cox Hos Hes was Kem w eee Kew How ems HOD ons mae Bom HO HO 5-3
Creating a Tables-Style Report... ...5 065 ies cna tee cares cee vee cee en 5-5
Summary of Considerations and Features ............eee eee eens 5-6
MOVING THE CUIOF 6.4 008 cae wre Rechd Gad God Wee Ue ONS EG OES Bes EON BG 5-7
Changing Column Width sc. naa ween noe coe cod Cm S99 Vink elle wee Gebie Hes 5-7
Switching Category Positions. sass co cow cao ne ean eae con wes wane see 5-8
Deleting Categories. vis wen ses waa aa woe es one caw exe owe ene cow wee 5-9
Inserting Previously Deleted CategorieS..........e cece eee eee nees 5-9
Changing Record Selection Rules . 0.5.65 bes ced coe tee eee tee eee oes 5-9
Arranging Records for the Report . ..... 2... 0s cee den cee coe new cee ee 5-10
Right: Justifying Categories 0... ois son nee sive en ee nee nee nee gee 8 5-10
Adding or Changing Report Names and Titles ............0.e0e. 5-11
Creating a Calculated Category «2. 0. ces cee cee oie wie cee wee eae oe 5-11
Addirig atid Removing Totals vices cas nie caw nae vas ce sae wae wore we 5-13
Controlling Grovip’ Totals. ses «cee cas cas eon wow van wae Key wee Hen wi 5-14
Creating a Labels-Style Report..........cecee cee tee cence da senceaee 5-15
Summary of Considerations and Features .......-.:+:eeeeeeeeeeee 5-15
Moving Tie Curse ce wine a0 cco x coms erm eee cine Won dee BSS Hee Oem Ged Be 5-17
Moving the Categories ao vics vices weis one cae com cin wee mie cee gee coe me 5-17
Deleting Categories or Spacing Lines From the Report ........... 5-17
Inserting Spacing Lines or Previously Deleted Categories......... 5-18
Loft Justifying Categories «sss iss css toy co coe 0a bos Hom Hee vee HO 5-18
Arranging Records for the Report ........ceseceecreeeeeenecenes 5-19
Changing Record Selection Rules ........0ccccensncccnnccrdeese 5-19
LOOKING at ROCOTAS!. cic asa naire wise vm coe wee cen ee Sin wae Ee Hae a 5-20
Printing Category Names on the Report........... cece ee cece ene. 5-20
Adding or Changing Report Names or Tifles .............eeeeees 5-20
Working With Printer Options «oi ic cos seu bes cai cee cee oe ee we oe 5-21
Using Left and Right Margin Options ...........0..0ee0ee. ToT 5-22
Using Top and Bottom Margin Options ......... 6 cee e eee eee eens 5-24
Using Other Formatting Options 5 ovis cau ois cae Kee noe bed nig HOR Be 5-26
Determining Spacing in Tables-Style Reports............eeeeeeee 5-27
Determining Spacing in Labels-Style Reports.............eseeeee 5-27
5-1
Report Styles
///€E-Z Pieces lets you create tables-style reports and labels-style reports.
Talbes-style reports list records in rows and columns, down the page.
Figure 5-1 illustrates a tables-style report, lists the names and addresses of
the members of an Apple User’s Group.
Wwing Se srisss
: Se 5-304-
' 3°>
”
7ToU.NM 7 TrIommin- G&
se ei 6 os 4 eo -e 8 Pe,
”* (=~ -¢
Figure 5-1.
Tables-Style Report
A labels-style report, on the other hand, lists records with categories printed
vertically down the page. Mailing labels are examples of labels-style reports.
Figure 5-2 illustrates a labels-style report from the same file as the User's
Group. This time, though, more specific information about each individual
is included.
Figure 5-2.
Labels-Style Report
S-2
i
wi
bi
When you think about whether you want to create a table-style report or a
labels-style report, decide whether you want your records in rows or
columns across the page, like the User’s Group Phone List or grouped
vertically down the page, like the Address Listing.
NOTE:
Table-style reports are similar to records in
multiple-record layout, and labels-style reports
are similar to records in single-record layout.
Labels-style reports allow you to print complete
records without page width limitations.
Report Formats
Report formats are specifications you give///E-2 Pieces to describe how a
report should be put together. For a tables-style report format, you tell how
records should be arranged, whether all categories should be included or
whether some should be deleted, and where categories should go. Your
specifications about group totals and grand totals are also included in the
report format.
In the User's Group Phone List Report, the individuals’ names, phone
numbers and model of computers are included in the report format.
For labels-style reports, you tell which categories should be included and
how they should be placed. In the Address Listing Report, address informa-
tion is included, but phone numbers are left out.
Report formats are saved with and become part of the Data Base file,
although they don’t affect the data itself in any way. They are always
available when the file is on the Desktop.
One Data Base file can have up to eight report formats.
Report Menu
When you are in Review/Add/Change for a file and indicate you want to
report (“OPEN-APPLE”-“P”), /// E-Z Pieces displays all the Report menu,
which is illustrated in Figure 5-3. It presents all your options for beginning
reporting.
9-3
REPORT MENU
File: User Group
Report: Labels
Figure 5-3.
Report Menu
. “Get a report format” displays the “Report Catalog”, which lists the
report formats you have already created for the file. After you select
one, you get the Report Format display for the report, so you can
make any necessary changes and print the report.
Option 1 isn’t highlighted if you have no report formats. If you
choose it anyway, ///E-Z Pieces replies that you have none, and
lets you choose whether you want to create a tables-style or labels-
style report format.
. “Create a new “tables” format” asks for a report name for your new
report. Then it presents the Report Format display for tables-style
reports for the file.
. “Create a new “labels” format” asks for a report name for you new
report. Then it presents the Report Format display for labels-style
reports for the file.
. “Duplicate an existing format” presents the Report Catalog so you
can select an existing format from the file so you can duplicate it.
After you give it anew name, ///E-Z Pieces presents the Report
Format display for the report. Choose this option if you want to use
an existing format as a basis but change its name and any other of its
specifications.
. “Erase a format” presents the Report Catalog for the file, so you can
select the report you want to erase. You must choose “Yes” in
response to the double-check erase question to make It definite that
you really want to erase the format.
. “Keep working with current format” appears only when you have
report formats. When you select it, / / / E-Z Pieces returns you to the
report format you have just been working with.
5-4
= im TF
‘wi imi
|)
:
ma wm il
im im il
sii) a) a)
Creating a Tables-Style Report
To create a tables-style report:
i”
2.
Start in Review/Add/Change of the file you want to create a report
for.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“P”. ///E-Z Pieces presents the Report
menu.
. Choose “Create anew “tables” format”. /// E-Z Pieces prompts you
for the name of the report.
. Type the name of the report, which can have up to 19 letters,
numbers, or special characters and can be the same as the file name.
Press “RETURN”. ///E-Z Pieces presents the Report Format
display.
Figure 5-4 illustrates the tables-style Report Format display for the User
Group file.
The options you have now for creating the report format.
Examples of records from the file. The changes you make in the report
format are reflected in the record examples, so you can see exactly what you
are doing as you go along.
Categories are designated A through Z, to make it easy for you to create
calculated categories.
PEPORT FORMAT
Figure 5-4.
Tables-Style Report Format Display
5-5
Options for creating the tables-style report format are described in the
following sections.
Summary of Considerations and Features
You have several main considerations in creating a tables-style report for-
mat. These main considerations are listed in Table 5-1, along with the Data
Base reporting features that relate to them.
Main Consideration
Moving the cursor on the Report
Format Display
Placing categories on the report
Including the categories you want
Getting records in the right order
Lining up entries
Providing a title for your report
Calculating in reports
Communicating with your printer
Data Base Feature
Moving the Cursor
Changing Column Width
Switching Category Positions
Deleting Categories
Inserting Previously Deleted
Categories
Arranging Records for the Report
Right Justifying Categories
Adding or Changing Report
Names or Titles
Creating Calculated Categories
Adding and Removing Totals
Specifying Group Totals
Working with Printer Options
Chapter 13, “Printers and Printing”
Table 5-1.
Main Considerations for Tables-Style Reports
5-6
nem@a wn wm te te Ww
mm id ra a) iw
a= Lee 7) tt
Fea
gm wm tz
ia ta et il
Bo i)
Moving the Cursor
When you move the cursor from category to category in the record exam-
ples, use the following cursor movement keystrokes:
What You Want What You Use
Move cursor one category to “RIGHT-ARROW”
the right
Move the cursor one category to “LEFT-ARROW”
the left
Changing Column Width
You can increase the width of a column for a report because information in
the category is too wide for the current column width. Or you can decrease
the width of acolumn because information in the category is narrower than
the column. Increasing or decreasing column width helps you make a report
look exactly the way you want it and shows the information most effectively.
Changing the widths is also helpful in ensuring that the listing is not too
wide. The column width is always identical in the right column of the layout.
It also ensures that information fits correctly on your printer.
5-7
To change the width of columns:
What You Want
Increase the width of a column
Decrease the width of a column
What You Use
Put the cursor on the column
Press
“OPEN-APPLE”-“RIGHT-ARROW”
Put the cursor on the column
Press
“OPEN-APPLE’-“LEFT-ARROW”
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Be sure columns are wide enough to hold infor-
mation in the categories. Columns that are too
narrow to hold the widest entry for numerical
categories cause / / / E-Z Pieces to display pound
signs (#) instead.
Switching Category Positons
You can switch categories with each other, thus placing categories exactly
where you want on the report. To do this:
What You Want
Switch a column with the one on
its right
Switch a column with the one on
its left
What You Use
Place the cursor on the category to
be moved.
Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“>” (do not
press “SHIFT”).
Place the cursor on the category
to be moved.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"<” (Again do
not press “SHIFT”).
///€-Z Pieces Tips
You can move a category where you want it, too,
by deleting it from one position (“OPEN-APPLE’-
“D”) and inserting it where you want it
(“OPEN-APPLE”-“I").
mim omZm omOomhhhUurmhCOU
momma mm mwr hUumT how
;
—— Se
Lai
Deleting Categories
You can delete unnecessary categories from a report format without affect-
ing the file. You can reinsert the category into the report format any time you
want.
To delete a category:
1. Place the cursor on the category you want to delete.
2. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"D”".
///E-Z Pieces Tips
To delete a category from your “file”, use the
“OPEN-APPLE”-“N” function while you are in
Review/Add/Change.
Remember, though, that you fose your report
formats when you delete acategory from the file.
Inserting Previously Deleted Categories
After you delete a category from a report format by using the “OPEN-
APPLE”-“D” function, you can insert it again whenevery you want. You can
also insert new categories.
To reinsert a previously deleted category:
1. Decide where you want to reinsert the previously deleted category.
Then place the cursor on the category just to the right of that position.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“I”. ///E-Z Pieces presents a numbered list
of previously deleted categories.
3. Choose the category you want to insert.
Changing Record Selection Rules
When you first create a report format, the record selection rule is “Selection:
All records”. Thus, all records are included in the report. You can change
record selection rules so that only records that meet the rule you specify are
printed. Record selection rules stay with the report format until you change
them.
NOTE:
See “Changing Record Selection Rules” in
Chapter 4.
Arranging Records for the Report
You can arrange records for the report so the records are printed in any
order you want. To arrange records:
1. Move the cursor to the category by which you want your records
arranged.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“A”.
3. Choose the way you want the records arranged.
The record arrangement specification is not saved with the report format.
NOTE:
See “Arranging Records” in Chapter 4 for infor-
mation on how records are arranged.
Right Justifying Categories
You can right justify information in categories with alphabetic or numeric
information in them. When you right justify information in alphabetic cate-
gories, the entries in the category line up right under each other, with an
even right margin. When you right justify information in categories with
numeric information, the decimal points line up under each other.
To right justify a column, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to the column you want to right justify.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“J”. /// E-Z Pieces asks you to specify the
number of decimal! places that should be included in each entry in
the specified column.
3. Type the number of decimal places and press “RETURN”. (If you are
right justifying alphabetic information, type “O” and press “RETURN”.)
///€-Z Pieces asks you how many blank spaces should be placed
after each entry. This is important in spacing columns across the
page.
4. Type the number of blank spaces that you want to be included and
press “RETURN”.
After you respond to these prompts, ///E-Z Pieces fills the appropriate
column in the record examples with “9”s to show how the information will
line up when it is printed.
5 sa :
nm mH Wh
mal
‘wa rw sg if) i) im) i)
rem@a wm mh Tr tH Ww
eal se ae | ae
eal
om, = |
a |
a=
im 8 a) a]
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you specify columns for totals using
“OPEN-APPLE”-“T”, they are automatically right
justified, and you don’t have to use “OPEN-
APPLE”-“J”.
Adding or Changing Report Names and Titles
The report name you give a report format appears at the top left of the report
when you print it and at the top left corner of the “REPORT FORMAT”
display. You can change this name whenever you want.
In addition, you can give a report a title. The title can be up to 79 characters
wide. It is printed at the top of each page of your report.
To change a report name or to give the report a title:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"N”. ///E-Z Pieces prompts you for the new
report name.
2. Type the new name of the report, which can be up to 19 characters
long. Then press “RETURN”. Just press “RETURN” if you don’t want
to change the report's name.
3. Typein the report's title at the cursor position just above the category
names, and press “RETURN”. Just press “RETURN” if you don’t
want to change the title you previously gave the report.
Creating Calculated Categories
///€-Z Pieces lets you create a new category by manipulating numerical
information contained in other categories. If you are keeping an inventory
file for the parts you sell in your bicycle shop, for example, you want a total
for the amount invested in each part. To get that total, you multiply the
quantity of each part (in one category) by the cost of each part (in the
second category).
To use acategory as part of a formula for a calculated category, you use the
letter under the category name. That Is, if the quantity of each part in the
inventory file is in column B and the cost of each part is in column D, then the
formula for the total investment per part is B * D.
To get the total of an order for a sales invoice, on the other hand, you
multiply the cost of the item (in column A) by the sales tax percentage (a
constant you include in the formula) and add this number to the cost of the
item. The formula for this calculated category is A * .05 +A (or A * 1.05 or
1.05 * A).
The first 26 columns in a report format are lettered from A through Z under
the category name. If you have more than 26 categories, and thus morethan
26 columns in your report, columns 27 through 30 won't have letters. If you
want to use information in columns 27-30 as the basis for your calculations,
you must either delete columns in the A-Z group or physically move
columns 27-30 to the left into the A-Z group.
NOTE:
Calculation rules are based on column letters. If
you rearrange columns, rules may apply to dif-
ferent columns.
Here are the steps for creating a calculated category:
1. Place the cursor one column to the right of where you want the
calculated category to appear.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"K” (for calculated category). A column
called ‘Calculated” appears in the space. The examples of informa-
tion in that column consist of “9”’s, which means the category will be
right justified. In addition, ///E-Z Pieces requests a name for the
calculated category.
3. Type the name of the category and press “RETURN”. The category’s
name can be up to 20 characters long. This is the name that will
appear on the report.
4. Type the calculation rules using the letters associated with the
appropriate columns. Use the following keys to designate the four
functions.
plus +
minus -
multiply *
divide /
All operations are performed from left to right.
After you enter the calculation rules, they appear above the double line at
the top of the display. ///E-Z Pieces then asks you how many decimal
places to include in this category.
5. Type the number of decimal places to include and press “RETURN”.
Just press “RETURN” if you want to accept /// E-Z Pieces’ default
value for this number. ///E-Z Pieces asks you how many blank
spaces to include after this category.
9-12
nrmoemmimt mtr wm Ww
’
eee COC"
=e ——— as =e
—— el
am lk
ia.
6. Type the number of blank spaces you want to follow the category
and press “RETURN”. Or accept the default by pressing “RETURN”.
WARNING
Be sure there are enough “9”’s on both sides of
the decimal point to hold the largest and smallest
calculated numbers If “““””” appears when the
column is printed or displayed, the field is too
short.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can’t see the contents of the new column
until you either print the report on a printer or
display it on the display. To do either, you use
“OPEN-APPLE’-"P".
You can use “OPEN-APPLE”-“T” to get a group
total and a grand total for the numbers in the
calculated category. You can't, however, use
“OPEN-APPLE”-“G” on the calculated category
to make it contro! group totals in other categor-
ies. Neither can you arrange records by the value
in the calculated category.
You can have three calculated categories in each
///€-Z Pieces report.
Adding and Removing Totals
It's easy to get a grand total for specified categories. Here’s how.
1. Place the cursor on the column you want to total.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“T”. ///E-Z Pieces asks the number of
decimal places that should be included in the category total.
3. Type the number of decimal places for the total and press “RETURN”.
Or accept ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess by pressing “RETURN”.
///€E-Z Pieces asks the number of blank spaces to include to the
right of the total.
4. Type the number of blank spaces to include and press “RETURN”.
Or accept ///E-Z Pieces’ default by pressing “RETURN”.
///€-Z Pieces inserts “9”’s in the category with the appropriate number of
5-13
decimal places. The “9”’s will be replaced by the entries in the category
when you print the report or by blanks if there is no information in the entry.
The double dashed line below the category indicates that the report will
include a grand total for this category.
Here’s how to remove the grand total:
1. Place the cursor on the category with the grand total.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“T”. The sample records will replace the
“O's,
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Follow the procedure above to get group totals
(subtotals) for categories. But, in addition, use
the “OPEN-APPLE”-“G”" function on the cate-
gory that should “control” the group totals.
Controlling Group Totals
To specify group totals, or subtotals, for a category, follow the directions in
“Adding and Removing Totals.” In addition, specify which category will
control the group totals. Whenever a change in value occurs in this control-
ling category, a group total is calculated and printed for categories you
specified with “OPEN-APPLE’-“T”.
To designate the controlling category for group totals:
1. Put the cursor on the controlling category.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"G”".
3. Choose “No” or “Yes” depending on whether you want to print group
totals only, or whether you want to print all the records as well.
4. Choose “No” or “Yes” depending on whether you want to go to anew
page after each group total. Your answer is probably “yes” if many
records will be included in each group total.
///€-Z Pieces displays the controlling category for the group totals to the
left and above the double line on the Report Format display.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You may want to arrange the records in your
report according to the controlling category,
too.
5-14
bd
eal
1 ) , , ) )
id il li
i
mmm mrt mm UMW
Creating a Labels-Style Report
To create a labels-style report, follow these instructions:
1. Start in the Review/Add/Change of the file you want to create a
report for.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-”P”. ///E-Z Pieces presents the Report
menu.
3. Choose “Create anew “labels” format”. / // E-Z Pieces prompts you
for the name of the report.
4. Type the name of the report, which can have up to 19 letters,
numbers, or special characters. Press “RETURN”. ///E-Z Pieces
presents the Report Format display.
Figure 5-5 illustrates the labels-style Report Format display for the
User Group file.
Figure 5-5.
Labels-Style Report Format Display
Options for creating the labels-style report are described in the
following sections.
Summary of Considerations and Features
You have several main considerations in creating a labels-style report for-
mat. These main considerations are listed in Table 5-2, along with the Data
Base reporting features that relate to them.
0-15
Main Consideration
Moving the cursor on the Report
Format display
Placing categories on the report
Getting records in the right order
including the records you want
Checking records in the format
you created
Including category names with
entries
Providing a title for your report
Communicating with your printer
Data Base Feature
Moving the Cursor
Moving Categories
Deleting Categories or Spacing
Lines From the Report
Inserting Spacing Lines or Pre-
viously Deleted Categories
Left Justifying Categories
Arranging Records
Changing Record Selection Rules
Looking at Records
Printing Category Names on the
Report
Adding or Changing Report
Names or Titles
Chapter 13, “Printers and Printing’
Table 5-2.
Main Considerations for Labels-Style Reports
5-16
FE
rm m meee hh we mh
m7
a tb
cal fa
mas
Moving the Cursor
To move the cursor about on the display, use the following cursor move-
ment keystrokes:
What You Use
“LEFT-ARROW",
“RIGHT-ARROW", “UP-ARROW"”,
“DOWN-ARROW", and “RETURN”
What You Want
Move the cursor left, right, up, or
down
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Although you can move the cursor anywhere
through the categories, you can move catego-
ries only when the cursor is on the first character
of the category.
Moving Categories
To place categories where you want them on the report, // / E-Z Pieces lets
you move them about on the display. To move categories:
1. Put the cursor on the first character of the category you want to
move.
2. Use the following cursor movement keystokes:
What You Use
“OPEN-APPLE”-"“LEFT-ARROW”,
“OPEN-APPLE”-“RIGHT-ARROW",
“OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW?”, or
“OPEN-APPLE”-“DOWN-ARROW"
What You Want
Move the category left, right, up,
or down
///E-Z Pieces protects the first two letters of a category name and thus
won't let you move one category on top of or through these first two letters.
Deleting Spacing Lines or Categories From the Report
You can delete spacing, or blank, lines or categories you don’t want to print
on the report.
5-17
To delete spacing lines or categories:
1. Putthe cursor on the first character of the category or on the spacing
line you want to delete.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-"D". When you delete a category, a spacing
line remains, which you may delete if you want.
Inserting Spacing Lines or Previously Deleted Categories
You can insert spacing lines or previously deleted categories. To do so,
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Deleting categories means they don't print on
the report, not that they are deleted from the file.
You can reinsert deleted categories any time you
want by using the “OPEN-APPLE’-"!” feature.
Spacing lines enable you to place categories
correctly in alabels-style report. You can control
spacing lines by deleting and inserting them
follow these steps:
1. Put the cursor where you want the category or spacing line to be
inserted.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"l”. ///E-Z Pieces displays the names of
deleted categories so that you can choose the one you want. It also
gives you the option of inserting a spacing line above the cursor
position or one below the cursor position, unless you already have
the maximum, 15 lines. If you want to insert a line below the last
category, just press “RETURN”.
3. Choose the option you want. It is inserted into the report format.
2.
Left Justifying Categories
///€-Z Pieces lets you place two categories so that they print right next to
each other. This is called left justifying categories. It is most useful when you
are creating a report format to print lables.
Here are examples of names on labels with and without justifying the last
name category:
With Left Justification
Joe Maxwell Joe Maxwell
Josephine Maxwell
Josephine Maxwell
9-18
Without Left Justifying
‘
$$ EF ——— A CS Fee Bas Gil Gee
nr mtinrntnmmHmt try Ww
am ill aaa eats nah
i
rem me meer
“ma tt
om oul iJ
ima
= s
Follow these steps to left justify categories:
1. Place the catgories side by side in the order you want them.
2. Put the cursor on the first character of the category you want to left
justfiy. This is the category on the right.
3. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“J". ///E-Z Pieces displays the“ ” charac-
ter to the left of the left justified category.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can see the effect of left justifying a category
only by using the “OPEN-APPLE’-“P” command
to actually print the report or display it on the
screen.
Arranging Records for the Report
You can arrange records for the report so the records are printed in any
order you want. The record arrangement specification is not saved with the
report format, however. To arrange records:
1. Move the cursor to the category by which you want your records
arranged.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“A”.
3. Choose the way you want the records arranged.
NOTE:
See “Arranging Records” in Chapter 4 for infor-
mation on how records are arranged.
Changing Record Selection Rules
When you first create a report format, the record selection rule is “Selection:
All records”. Thus, all records are included in the report. You can change
record selection rules so that only records that meet the rule you specify are
displayed or printed. Record selection rules stay with the report format and
change only when you change them.
To change the record selection rule, use the “OPEN-APPLE”-"“R” command.
NOTE:
See ‘‘Changing Record Selection Rules” in
Chapter 4.
9-19
Looking at Records
The Report Format display displays the category names for the report format
you are working on. You can zoom in to check actual records, if you want.
When you do, you see what the information looks like in the format you have
specified. After you have zoomed in to the first record in the file, you can
move through the file, looking at additional records.
What You Want
To zoom in to actual records
What You Do
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“Z2”
To move about through the files
after you zoom in
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"1” through
“9” to move proportionally
through the file
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-">” (no
“SHIFT”) to display next record
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“<” (no
“SHIFT”) to display the previous
record
To zoom out to the category Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“2”
names again
Printing Category Names on the Report
You can specify that category names should be printed on the report as well
as the actual entries. To request a category name with the entries:
1. Putthe cursor on the first category name you want to appear on the
report.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“V”. The entry from the first record in the file
appears next to the category name to show you how the printed
information will look.
To remove a category name from the report:
1. Put the cursor on the first letter of the category name you want to
remove from the report.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”’-"V".
Adding or Changing Report Names or Titles
The report name you give a report format appears at the top left of the report
when you print it and at the top left corner of the “REPORT FORMAT” display.
You can change this name whenever you want.
5-20
rr mime mereieOnrellOCrerellC reel reOCUeelClUrelUrelCU
m ‘
h
in
5
In addition, you give areport atitle. The title can be up to 79 characters wide.
It is printed at the top center of each page of your report.
To change a report name or give the report a title:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"N”. ///E-Z Pieces prompts you for the new
report name.
2. Type in the new name of the report, which can be up to 19 charac-
ters long. Then press “RETURN”. Or just press “RETURN” if you don’t want
to change the report’s name.
3. Type in the report's title at the cursor position, above the double line,
and press “RETURN”. Just press “RETURN” if you don’t want to change
a title you previously gave the report.
Working With Printer Options
After you create a report format for a tables-style or labels-style report, you
must communicate certain information to ///E-Z Pieces about how it
should work with your printer. You do that by using printer options.
Here's how to tell ///E-2 Pieces you want to work with printer options:
What You Want
Indicate that you want to work
with printer options
What You Do
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"O” from
the Report Format display.
Return to the Report Format Press “ESC”,
dispiay atter you are finished with
ihe printer options.
After you indicate you want to work with printer options, ///E-Z Pieces
presents the Printer Options display. The Printer Options display for tables-
style reports is illustrated in Figure 5-6, and the Printer Options display for
labels-style reports is illustrated in Figure 5-7.
9-21
File: User Group PRINTER DPT 1aNS Escape: Fesort Former
Reportt Phone List
SS Speen ee an aa ey
2eEaeus esse > >S===== eee
Left and right maraing SS a ae
er: Platen bhiath S.9 inches PL: Paper Cenagth
. ; ry Tht. 7
*; Left Margin : =
> Right Marain O.0 inenet BM: Bottom Maroin
: Chars per Inch 10 Lis
Lime wicth -
Crier per tine Cest) Bo
<6 Se Sais Desens Formatting options
SC: Send Specis! Codes te printer
PO: Print » Dash vwihen on entre +2 Btanb
PH: Print report Header ef top of e#ch pede
Single, Double or Triple Spacing ‘S5-DS-TS-
“Specify informetion about “our printe
Menu) gives vou sdditional contra! over printere
> two letter option code
Figure 5-6.
Tables-Style Printer Options
= wm
PEs Prenkt #& freth when an eritr if plant
: Print reper: Header tf tap of esch
+ Brine 4 ewhen af! entries aon line or
PC hI “hen s
: Keen fumbéer of lines the Same wi thin
yout four prenmter*
‘ ca
Figure 5-7,
Lables-Style Printer Options
The information that follows tells how to work with these printer options.
Using Left and Right Margin Options
Table 5-3 describes left and right margin options.
0-22
Prem mim rremrmhemrmeOeOnrerlCUrerellCUhrellCUrlCUrlClCUrelUmrlCUh
rw
‘
NR TT Tt LEA Lt Ll A i i i I i tH 8 a |
ial
am iff idl
ms olmi
The Printer Option
“Platen width (PW)”
“Left margin (LM)”
“Right margin (RM)”
“Characters per Inch”
Controls
The distance in inches the printer's
printhead travels across the
paper. The left edge of the paper
should correspond to where the
printhead stops on the left.
This number can be no greater
than the platen width you specify
in Other Activities menu option
“Specify information about your
printer(s).”
Default = 8.0 inches
The maximum you can use is 13.2
inches.
The width of the left margin in
inches
Numbers can be in tenths of
inches, that is, 1.5 inches, 1.6
inches, 2.0 inches.
Default = 0 inches
The maximum you can use is
9.0 inches.
The width of the right margin in
inches
Numbers can be in tenths of
inches, that is, 1.5 inches, 1.6
inches
Default = 0 inches
The maximum you can use is
9.0 inches.
The number of printed characters
per inch
Characters per inch can be from 4
through 24.
Default = 10 characters per inch
Table 5-3.
Left and Right Margin Options
5-23
When you change any of the above values, / / / E-Z Pieces instantly recalcu-
lates the line width and the estimated characters per line according to the
following formulas:
Xx
Follow these steps to change the value of the left and right margin options.
Platen width
Left margin
Right margin
Line width
Chars per inch
Chars per line
For example:
8.0 inches
1.5 inches
1.0 inches
5.5 inches
x 12 characters per inch
= 66 characters per line
1. Type the code that stands for the option and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the new value for the option and press “RETURN”. You don't
have to type “.0” if the new value is a whole number. For example,
if the new right margin is 1 inch, type “1”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
For tables-style reports, the characters per line
shouldn't be any less than the length of the line
on the report format, which is specified by
“Len”, followed by the number of characters
long each line will be.
Using Top and Bottom Margin Options
Table 5-4 describes top and bottom margin options.
The Printer Option
“Paper length (PL)”
“Top margin (TM)”
Controls
The vertical measurement of the
paper you are using, in inches
Default = 11 inches
The maximum you can use Is 25.4
inches
The length in inches from the top
of the paper to the first line of
printing
5-24
or mh ©
— OT TE TT ES SL ee 3
?
=o oe oe ome oe ee eo
wi
om
imei
ma
“Bottom margin (BM)”
“Lines per inch (LI)”
Default = 0.0 inches. This default
value accommodates /// E-Z
Pieces users who have sheet feed
printers (printers with no tractor).
If you have one of these printers,
you should leave the default at 0
and position the paper exactly
where you want the first line to
be.
If you have a tractor feed printer,
you will probably want to change
this value.
The maximum you can use is
9.0 inches.
The length in inches form the last
line of printing to the bottom of
the paper
Default for tables-style reports =
2.0 inches
Default for labels-style reports =
0.0 inches
The maximum you can use is
9.0 inches.
The number of lines to be printed
per vertical inch on the page
Default = 6
You can use 6 or 8.
Table 5-4.
Top and Bottom Margin Options
When you change any of the above values, ///E-Z Pieces instantly
recalculates the printing length and the lines per page according to the
following formulas:
Paper length
Top margin
Bottom margin
Printing length
For example:
9-25
11.0 inches
2.0 inches
1.5 inches
= 7.5 inches
X Lines per inch x 6 lines per inch
= Lines per page = 45.0 lines per page
Follow these steps to change the value of the top and bottom margin
options:
1. Type the code that stands for the option and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the new value for the option and press “RETURN”. You don't
have to type “.0” if the new value is a whole number. For example,
if the new bottom margin is 1 inch, type “1”.
Using Other Formatting Options
Table 5-5 describes other formatting options.
Control
Use this code if you want your
printer to use a feature not pro-
vided for in Data Base reports,
such as proportional spacing or
boldface. To find out what special
codes your printer can use, check
in the manual that came with it.
This printer option can have the
value “yes” or “no”. Default = “no”
If you change the option to “yes,
///E-Z Pieces asks for the con-
trol characters. Type the control
characters and type “”” when
you finish. If you change this
option to “no”, you must include
control characters for characters
per inch.
The Printer Options
“Send Special Codes to
Printer (SC)”
If an entry is blank, ///E-Z Pieces
can print a single dash to mark its
place.
This printer option can have the
value “yes” or “no”.
Default = “no”
“Print a Dash When an Entry Is
Blank (PD)”
The Report header consists of the
filename, the report name, the
record selection rule, the page
“Print Report Reader at top of
each page (PH)”
5-26
nmrmi mi Om OO COCUMUlCUM MTUOOlCU MTOTOTlCU TTC TULTTlCU TTC rreClCUrTOTCUrelCUrlUCU Ul CU
eee
a a
eee in Ss ee
;
number, and the date. If you don’t
print a report header, the only
information that appears across
the top of each page of your
report is the title (created with
“OPEN-APPLE”-"N”).
The value for this option can be
“yes” or “He”.
Default = “yes” Choose “no” for
labels.
Table 5-5.
Other Formatting Options
To change the value of the above options:
1. Type the code that stands for the option and press “RETURN”.
Determining Spacing in Tables-Style Reports
You can specify whether you want your tables-style report to be single,
double, or triple spaced. ///E-Z Pieces’ default is single spacing. Here's
how to change the spacing:
ls Type the code that stands for the spacing you want, “S” for single
spacing, “DS” for double spacing, or “TS” for triple spacing.
Determining Spacing in Labels-Style Reports
Two printer options determine spacing in labels-style reports. They are
very important for labels themselves because labels are a fixed length,
usually one inch, and you usually want to control the number of lines on
each label. These two options allow you to be precise because they con-
trol the number of lines that will appear on each record.
Printer Options
“Omit line when all entries on line
are blank (OL)”
Controls
If you leave the value of this
option at ///E-Z Pieces’ default,
“yes”, ///E-Z Pieces will not sub-
stitute a blank line when all
entries on a line are blank. That
is, it will close up lines with blank
entries.
0-27
“Keep number of lines the same
within each record (KS)”
If you change this option to “no”,
///€E-Z Pieces will include a
blank line in your record even if
there is no entry for any category
on that line.
If you change this option to “no”,
the next option, “Keep number of
lines the same within each
record”, is eliminated.
If “OL” is “yes” and you leave the
value of this option at ///E-Z
Pieces’ default, “yes”, ///E-Z
Pieces will make sure that all of
your records have the same
number of lines by adding extra
blank lines at the bottom of the
record.
If “OL” is “yes” and you change
this option to “no”, all your
records won't contain the same
number of lines if there are blank
entries.
9-28
ee
mmm oe
————————————— TTT A Kt LT
mo i
To change the value of the above options:
1. Type the code that stands for the option and press “RETURN”.
///€-Z Pieces automatically changes the value to its opposite.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Here's how the “OL” and “KS” options apply
specifically to printing labels. Suppose you have
the following report format and record:
Name: Randy Sletter
Company: —
Address: P.O. Box 2
City/State/Zip: Central City, TX 77047
(spacing line)
(spacing line)
Here's how the record would print with the var-
ious “OL” and “KS” options:
With “OL” = “yes” and “KS” = “yes”
Randy Sletter
P.O. Box 2
Central City, TX 77047
(spacing line)
(Spacing line)
(spacing line)
With “OL” = “yes” and “KS” = “no”
Randy Sletter
P.O. Box 2
Central City, TX 77047
(spacing line)
(spacing line)
With “OL” = “no
Randy Sletter
P.O. Box 2
Central City, TX 77047
(Spacing line)
(Spacing line)
5-29
tf.
ee ema ae ae Oe eh Oe eo
a a aaa
|
in} oka)
BE
- se
Chapter 6
Understanding the Word Processor
The Word Processor’s Two Main Functions .............eeeeceeeees 6-1
PUT Te ESS GAS HO GRU tba Wi Ben Sans Ged Ken id ore WER tee RSE eee 6-2
Pe TOE Bien Cae ad ned WO Wek Sed Eee ad Be ee Os es 6-2
///E-Z Pieces’ Word Processor allows you to work with documents: reports,
letters, memos, chapters. The Word Processor makes it easy for you to
create professional looking documents in record time.
This chapter discusses the Word Processor’s two main functions, illustrates
its flow of activities, and discusses its file guidelines.
The Word Processor’s Two Main Functions
///E-Z Pieces’ Word Processor features have two main functions, as Figure
6-1 shows. The first function, working with information in Word Processor
documents, allows you to type documents and quickly and easily edit
mistakes and make other necessary changes. You can also use special
features that allow you to delete, move, or copy blocks of text within docu-
ments, replace old information with new information, find specific informa-
tion, and others.
The second function, formatting documents, lets you specify the exact
layout, or arrangement, of your document. When you format documents,
you create specifications for each document that control margins, paging,
and that require special printing techniques such as boldface and under-
lining.
WORD PROCESSOR
FORMATTING D MENTS WORKING WITH
aon INFORMATION IN DOCUMENTS
SPECIFY LAYOUT TYPE/EDIT
CONTROL MARGINS/PAGING/ETC. DELETE/MOVE/COPY BLOCKS
SPECIAL TECHNIQUES BOLD/UNDERLINE FIND/REPLACE INFORMATION
Figure 6-1.
Overview of Word Processor
6-1
Activity Flow
Figure 6-2 is a flowchart of your activities with Word Processor files. Whereas
the activities of ///E-Z Pieces’ Data Base fall into two different areas,
Review/Add/Change and Report, all the Word Processor’s activities take
place in Review/Add/Change.
WORD PROCESSOR
REVIEW/ADD/CHANGE
TYPE/EDIT DOCUMENT SPECIFY FORMATS
PRINT DOCUMENTS
Figure 6-2.
Word Processor Flowchart
File Guidelines
The only Word Processor file guideline is for the length of a Word Processor
file. A Word Processor file can be 3584 lines maximum. For single-spaced
pages of 54 lines each, that’s about 66 pages.
Another way of judging Word Processor file size is by number of characters:
a file with 47,000 characters (maximum size for a computer with 128K RAM)
is about eighteen pages long. A file with 175,000 characters (maximum om
fora computer with 256K RAM) is about 70 pages, however the maximum O
66 pages discussed above will still apply, so the overall maximum is 66 pages
for a 256K computer.
6-2
maa ae OO oe
wi
NN
eb
aw wl il i
a) Oka
lei 6th] isk Gets
me
Chapter 7
Working With Word Processor Documents
Mang &, DOGUINGNE ics cwacnwe 626 9x EN ERS FRAP ERETEE SE CG% FOR dw AM 7-2
Planning a Word Processor Document...........-.seeceeeeeeees 7-2
Grating TNE: DOCUMENT wi occas eceie conse cere erect niece wasme-auwce-aimvacesere anace-wiete 7-4
Pe a Gert hock ern erincgrmare areca narenenmsro dea. eIOER 7-4
aaE Jak PP iceman nnroserenrnanineren aca anee-ique naieetieaumentns 7-5
TYPING ANG. Eating Information -6c-60.<-1000erweanes nes Ree enema cen 7-5
WIS: VRAD STOURE nase. ccenaie wawrewia we pr Lely Gale BAH RITA SR RUE Lee Kare 7-5
LISTE I ISATSIN gcpe-y 0-9-4956 88S RES ENG AOA dW ale ded wT acne cam 7-6
VSS: PTR ION 6 55505 pa eine de eeded ard Gt Siklw maw menseew nme maven 7-6
striking Over Existing Information ..... 0.0.04 a. cnvenesweeeeeeen 7-7
ETC FO OOR, reas sinccmureue reste enrosereeeaanmnnemaieee nee 7-7
Moving the Cursor Within. 42 DOGUIMENE ics ss csieaa wears gare ware were s 7-8
VIGWING YOU DOCUMGING wr ases sass. ewiw ork aie 04s FORO KAY EEE ZR LORR cide 7-9
Text &.GasesSersive VOxt ww. wos asin cae gcaee-nwe 4.60 4085 5b Ree aivmave 7-9
LAST) TONIION s-9c0e-en 450 0k ei ws a dee de Nhe dean wwe maremnce 7-10
MEDIACING EXIStiFiC: (WHTORTTIATION, o4.oc 4 a iseincdin scam aarp wocerneqememaracoaace 7-11
Replacing One or Several Occurrences of Information......... 7-11
Replacing All Occurrences of Information .................05, 7-12
Moving Text Withinia DOCUMOENE sscais <suesaecneeunenecanee nan 7-13
Copying Text Within a DOCUMe@ME sai ccasien ces ooe4 hoes oo ses ace 7-14
ETIGSPS PRT OY va: :96 eave 359 55 wR KOTO Roa ach ec VRE % iw xe 7-15
EACIONS TIE uses -wcauseawcure eeacw waeW.aieks bach Die dW Ventinabe-w eve eroreamaanen 7-15
PINGING 2 SDSCIIG PARES gc ceeded hess wcmmeren emreuverewnre acuta ava 7-17
ee i irr cacao acmmnletacormewniarnaonars meacanetcaiannmmn cae eetces 7-18
a neice dip menarche ineaaticsioads 7-18
Pe Ot rence accnergenmanirs mannan rane ee Rae eeTa a a 7-18
Pinging Oenens for Printer s6sivacriaw sresais 859-055.05KNGhAik eam Sales 7-19
LAG) TADS ws cara nny wawe LAF RUNS ROS GOED AW acaminehh ERG oon oou noses 7-19
Setting and ClAriiG TAOS aii cceccie aosia tae aceve wanecocenwevarp mae arenes 7-19
MOVING TING GOPSOF 16 TADS cease score seimcy e:9ramerecnqonceecnwiavernucavew ware 7-19
Changing the Name of Your File ..... 2.0: 00. sesseesevaueedev vas 7-20
It's easy to use the Word Processor’s features to type documents, editing
information as you go; moving, copying, and deleting blocks of text when-
ever necessary; finding information; and replacing incorrect information.
This chapter explains features that allow you to get the information you
want in your documents with a minimum of effort.
f-7
Making a Document
This section tells how to plan a new Word Processor document and how to
make a Word Processor document from scratch or from a text (ASCII) file.
Planning a Word Processor Document
///€-Z Pieces’ Word Processor is very flexible. Assuming that you have
some vague idea of what you want your documentto say, all that’s required
when you plan itis that you know ///E-Z Pieces’ default settings about how
your document should look. These default values are contained in
specifications that come with all new Word Processor documents. You can
use these default values or change them.
Here are the default values that will be beginning specifications for every
new document you create:
1. Specifications for horizontal spacing. /// E-Z Pieces’ default values
are:
—Platen width = 8.0 inches
— Left Margin = 1.0 inches
— Right Margin = 1.0 inches
— Characters per inch = 10
NOTE:
See “Controlling Horizontal Spacing” in Chap-
ter 8.
1. Specifications for vertical spacing. ///E-Z Pieces provides these
default values:
— Paper length = 11.0 inches
— Top margin = 0.0 inches
— Bottom margin = 2.0 inches
— Lines per inch =6
NOTE:
See “Controlling Vertical Spacing” Chapter 8.
3. Whether lines should be
— Unjustified—that is, even left and uneven right margin
— Justified—that is, both margins even
— Centered
7-2
mmm ea ee
™
ig] a aa
BE)
///€-Z Pieces’ default is that you’ll want your lines unjustified.
NOTE:
See “Controlling Layout” Chapter 8.
4. Spacing
— Single spacing -
— Double spacing
— Triple spacing
//€E-Z Pieces’ default is that you’ll want single spacing.
NOTE:
See “Controlling Vertical Spacing” in Chapter 8.
Just a few keystrokes let you change any of the above default values to the
value you want, either at the beginning of or within your document.
In addition to the specifications listed above, you may want to think ahead of
tabs. Tabs are set initially every five spaces. You can reset them at the
beginning or as you go.
If you’re formatting certain types of formal business documents, you may
want to think about these specifications.
— Layout techniques such as page headers and footers. You may have
standard ones in your company, or you can create them as you go. You
can create them after you're finished with the document, too, if you want.
— Section headers. If you're following a-standard procedure or want to
create one, you may want to use a system of headers to start with.
You may never use any special layout techniques or section headers. You
may never even underline or use boldface. What you should be convinced
of, however, is /// E-Z Pieces’ flexibility. You can make up your mind about
specifications or change your mind at any time, and ///E-Z Pieces will
respond.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can make a Word Processor file containing
nothing but specifications you use frequently.
Then, to start a new document, simply get this
file and start putting information into it. Be sure
to change its name before you save it, though.
(-3
Creating the Document
Follow these steps to create a new document:
1. Choose “Add files to the Desktop” from the Main Menu.
2. Choose “Word Processor” from the Add Files menu.
3. Choose “From Scratch” or “From a text (ASCII) file” from the Word
Processor menu.
From Scratch
Follow these steps to make a file from scratch:
1. Type the name of the new file in response to “Type a name for this
new file”. File names can be up to 15 characters long. They must start
with a letter, and they can contain upper- or lowercase letters,
numbers, periods, and spaces. Then press “RETURN”.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the display for a new Word Processor document.
1 The name of your new file
REVIEW ROD. CHANGE
== = === |=
rier j¢t Document tape: Main Menu
==SSa =us | = sse= |s== =| sss!'saea! eee t
will be Inserted Into the document
3 Where tabs are set now, every five spaces
Where you'll start typing your new document
5
The “line indicator" and the “column indicator” tell cursor position on the display
Figure 7-1.
New Word Processor Document
At first you may be a bit intimidated by a blank screen. Most writers are. If
you don’t know how to begin, type anything. You can always delete it. Or, if
you're having trouble thinking of an opening line, start with another line,
perhaps in the middle. Hardly anyone does an opening line first, anyway.
7-4
ninmntrtrtr ht fF
|
‘we
‘
TTT TE SLL LS SE — SL A AS I SF
as
From A Text (ASCII File)
///€-Z Pieces’ Word Processor can use ASCII text files on SOS-formatted
disks as sources for its own documents. Text files are made by systems such
as Apple Writer, the Pascal Editor when the environmentis set to ASCII, and
other word processors (although ASCII may not be their native mode).
Check the user manual of the system that originated your file to see if it
creates ASCII text files.
Follow these steps to make a Word Processor file from a text file:
1. If you choose “From a text (ASCII) file”, // / E-Z Pieces asks for the
text file’s pathname. If the file is in the current drive. you can type the
name of the file and press “RETURN”. If the file is in another drive,
type the complete pathname and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the name of the new file in response to “Type a name for this
new file”. File names can be up to 15 characters long. They must start
with a letter, and they can contain upper- or lowercase letters,
numbers, periods, and spaces. Then press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed briefly in Chapter 1 of
this manual and in the Apple / / / Owner’s Manual.
Typing and Editing Information
It’s easy to type information into Word Processor documents and then edit
incorrect information. Guidelines follow.
Word Wraparound
When you type information into a document, the lines of informatiun go into
the document as if they were wrapped around a pole. This feature is called
word wraparound.
Lines of information in a paragraph are actually long spirals of characters.
///E-Z Pieces formats each line for you according to the margins you have
set so that words do not break at the end of lines. If you come to the end ofa
line in the middle of a work, ///E-Z Pieces brings the whole word to the
beginning of the next line.
NOTES:
Control word wraparound by using sticky spaces,
which do not allow breaks between words.
7-5
See “Using Sticky Spaces” in Chapter 8 for
information on how to use sticky spaces.
Using “RETURN”
Each time you press “RETURN”, you get a space one line long. You do not
press “RETURN” at the end of each line of information within a paragraph as
you do when you type with a typewriter. Instead, you just keep typing.
A paragraph has only one “RETURN'’—at its end.
Press “RETURN” when you want
— To end a paragraph.
— To create a blank line.
— Toendaline without any punctuation, at the end of each line of the name
and address lines in a letter, for example.
Inserting Information
Use the insert cursor, which is the blinking bar cursor, when you want
information you type to be inserted. Anything you type with the insert cursor
goes to the left of the character the cursor is on. The character the cursor is
on and to the right of it moves to the right. Figure 7-2 shows an example of
inserting.
Figure 7-2.
Inserting
1. Get the insert, blinking bar cursor if you don’t have it: press
“OPEN-APPLE’-"E’.
. Move the cursor to the ’a’ in “as a vote-getter”.
. Type “and weaknesses” and press SPACE once.
Move the cursor to the “y” in “your mother’s maiden name”.
Type “as the shape of your ears and” and press SPACE once.
af ON
7-6
r=
i
'_ &s
—_—s
mid i id
Striking Over Existing Information
Use the overstrike cursor, which is the blinking square cursor, when you
want to type over existing information with new information. Strikeover
within old text is limited by existing carriage returns. That is, you can strike
over characters up to an existing carriage return. When the cursor comes to
the carriage return, characters are inserted. They push the carriage return
along until you finish what you are typing.
Figure 7-3 shows and example of striking over existing information.
It j= nat good enough to Mave 8 good anceetrr,
police recerd and credit rating, There a
several other factors which cauld rowsuct , slr upi«
an automatic contender or rule wou out from the
beginning.
Figure 7-3.
Striking Over
1. If you don't have it, get the overstrike, blinking square, Cursor: press
“OPEN-APPLE”-"E".
. Move the cursor to the “r’ in “royjrt ,slr upi”.
. Type “either make you”.
Move he cursor to the space between “x” and “an”.
. Press DELETE once.
ak Ww NP
Editing Information
When you're editing information, use
— DELETE to erase one character to the left of the cursor.
— CONTROL and Y to delete information to the end of the line the cursor is
on, up to acarriage return, if there is one. The Word Processor closes the
space created.
7-7
— The Word Processor’s cursor movement keystrokes to move the cursor
past characters without changing them.
— “OPEN-APPLE”-“E” to change between the insert and the overstrike
cursors.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Zoom in to see all the existing cursor returns.
They're noted as “backslashes” when you're
zoomed in to the text. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“Z”
to zoom in. You can be zoomed in or out when
you insert new information or strike over existing
information.
Moving the Cursor within a Document
It's easy to move the cursor though a Word Processor document. You can
move it character by character, word by word, and line by line, or you can
move it through larger units of information.
To move the cursor within a Word Processor document:
Move the cursor to the rightorto RIGHT-ARROW, LEFT-ARROW
the left from characterto character LEFT-ARROW moves the cursor
backwards from the first
character on a line to the last
character on the preceding line. If
that line is blank, the cursor
moves to the first space on it and
then immediately to the end of
the line above it.
Move the cursor up to down from UP-ARROW, DOWN-ARROW
line to line
Move the cursor to the right orleft “OPEN-APPLE’-RIGHT-ARROW
to the space before the next or or LEFT-ARROW
preceding word or group of
characters
Move the cursor to the next “TAB”
tab stop
Move the cursor to the previous “OPEN-APPLE”-"“TAB”
tab stop
7-8
“am th
a
nm
ia
i
it
Lad
wR
-— &
se
Move the cursor through a “OPEN-APPLE”-“I” through “9”
document
Move the cursor to the bottom of “OPEN-APPLE’-“DOWN-ARROW”
this screen and then to the
bottom of the next screenful of
information (20 lines)
Move the cursor to “OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW”
the top of this screen and then to
the top of the previous screenful
of information (20 lines)
Viewing Your Document
For the most part, / / / E-Z Pieces follows this rule: What you see is what you
get! That is, whatever you see displayed is what you will get when you print.
It’s easy, therefore, to get a pretty accurate idea of how a document will look
just by looking at how it’s displayed.
Several ///E-Z Pieces features will bend the rule a bit:
— Characters printed in proportional spacing will look different from those
on the screen because characters on the screen are all the same width.
— Printer options noted by a caret on the screen cause the number of
characters per line on the screen to be different from the number of
characters when printed, because carets don’t print.
— Printing with more than 12 characters per inch or 79 characters per line
may cause what's printed to look different from what's on the display.
— Double or triple spacing.
— Page headers and footers not shown on each page of the display.
For example, if you print with 10 characters per inch and use no printer
options with carets, you can expect that what you see is what you get. If you
have a wide printer platen or use very narrow margins, however, the rule
doesn’t work because more characters will print on each line than can be
displayed.
Text and Case Sensitive Text
There are two types of text that can be found or replaced. When you choose
Find or Replace, you must also choose what type of text you want to work
with:
“Text” will find or replace text that is written in any combination
of upper- or lowercase characters. For example, if you want to
find the word “the”, /// E-Z Pieces will also find “THE” and
“The”.
“Case sensitive text” will find or replace only those occurences
of text that exactly match the character you type. For example,
if you specify the word “The”, it will only find “The”, and not
“the” or “THE”.
Deleting Information
You can delete information in two ways: you can use the DELETE key
(BACKSLASH key on older Apple /// computers) or the Delete commana.
Both delete methods take you at your word: anything you delete is gone.
If you are typing and make a mistake, you should delete backwards,
character by character:
— Press DELETE to erase incorrect information and back the cursor up to
where you can start typing again.
If you want to delete larger chunks of text, follow these steps:
1. Move the cursor to the beginning or the end of the information you
want to delete.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D”.
3. Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the information you want
to delete. /// E-Z Pieces highlights this information as you go.
deleted information was. (If you change your mind about deleting,
press ESCAPE instead).
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Follow this procedure to delete screenfuls of
information at atime: press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D”.
Then press “OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW’” until
you have highlighted enough information. Then
press “RETURN”.
You can delete to the end of your document, too.
As a matter of fact, you can delete your whole
document at once. First, press “OPEN-APPLE”-
“7”. Then press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D” and “OPEN-
APPLE”-“9”. Then press “RETURN”.
7-10
we
ree OOOO lle
“am wm tt
am ll
Alka a a a
To delete printer options, zoom in, move the
cursor to the line you want to delete, press
“OPEN-APPLE”-“D”, and then press “RETURN’.
To delete a pagebreak line, put the cursor
anywhere on the line, press “OPEN-APPLE’-
“D)” and then press “RETURN”. If you do delete
these lines, however, the existing page calcula-
tions go away, and you will have to recalculate
page breaks.
Replacing Existing Information
///E-Z Pieces lets you replace one, several, or all occurrences of
information within a document with new information. Whether you decide
to replace occurrences one at a time or all at once depends on whether you
want to see each occurrence before the replacement.
The replaced text is the existing information. The replacing text is the new
information. Both can be up to 30 characters long.
///E-Z Pieces keeps a record of the last text you asked it to replace or find
(“OPEN-APPLE”-"F”). When you ask to replace text the next time, ///E-Z
Pieces supplies the last replaced or found text as Its best guess for what you
want this time. Press “RETURN” if you want to replace the next occurrence
of this same information. Or type new text and press “RETURN” if you want
to replace different information.
For example,
“mountains” will be the best guess
lf you last asked ///E-Z Pieces |
for the next replace or find.
to replace “mountains” with
“molehills”
\f the text cannot be found, / // E-Z Pieces responds with “Not found, press
Space Bar to continue”. That message means the text isn'tin that part of the
file you asked // / E-Z Pieces to search, or in the whole file if you started at
the beginning.
Replacing One or Several Occurrences of Information
When you follow these instructions to replace one or several occurrences of
information with new information, you can decide whether or not to make
the replacement beforehand:
7-11
1. Move the cursor to wherever you want ///E-Z Pieces to start
searching. (Remember you can easily get to the beginning of a
document with “OPEN-APPLE”-“1”.)
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"R” (for Replace). ///E-Z Pieces supplies
the last found or replaced text if you have used find or replace in the
session.
. Type the replaced text. Then press “RETURN”.
. Type the new text. Then press “RETURN”,
. Choose “One at a time”.
. ///E-Z Pieces highlights the first occurrence of the old information.
Choose “No” or “Yes”, depending on whether or not you want to
replace it.
7. ///E-Z Pieces continues to highlight occurrences of the old
information and asks you if you want to replace it, until it finds no
more occurrences.
Ooo & W
lf you want to stop replacing at any time, press ESCAPE.
Replacing All Occurrences of Information
You can replace all occurrences of information automatically without
having to check and respond yes or no before each replacement. Here’s
how:
1. Move the cursor to wherever you want ///E-Z Pieces to start
searching.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“R” (for Replace).
. Type the text you want to replace. Then press “RETURN”.
. Type the new text. Then press “RETURN”,
5. Choose “All”.
& W MY
///E-Z Pieces makes all the replacements automatically.
Making replacements automatically gives you less control over the
replacements. For example, supposing you want to replace “the” with
“those”. Each occurrence of “the”, including “there”, is replaced by “those”.
That means Becomes
“there” “thosere”
To make sure ///E-Z Pieces replaces only what you want it to, you should
make the text to be replaced unique . You could ask ///E-Z Pieces to
replace “ the ” with “ those ”, for example. Then you could eliminate the
replacement in “there”.
7-12
h
rey
oe =)
==)
le ’
=)
=
,
.
arr ial la a aa ter tera ter lr kk
///€-Z Pieces considers spaces at the beginning or end of the information
you type to be part of the text.
Moving Text Within a Document
It's easy to move text within a document: words, paragraphs, or blocks of
information up to a total of 250 lines.
To move text within a document:
1. Move the cursor to the first or the last character of the information
you want to move.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“M” (for Move).
3. Choose “Within document”. Then/// E-Z Pieces presents the text in
zoomed-in format, so you can see all the cursor returns and printer
options in the text. They help you be very specific about what
information you move.
4. Move the cursor to the end or the beginning of the information you
want to move. Then press “RETURN”.
5. Movethe cursor to the place where you want to move the information.
6. Press “RETURN” again. The information is moved.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
If you move part of a paragraph, ///E-Z Pieces
closes up the space where the information was.
Try to move only the information you want, with
or without surroundings spaces, blank lines, or
carriage returns. You may have to adjust spac-
ing, however, after you move the information.
That’s easy to do—delete spaces with DELETE.
And add spaces with the insert cursor and
“SPACE”.
The copy feature is similar to the move feature
except that copy lets you leave the text in its
original place, too.
Figure 7-4 shows a paragraph where text will be moved.
7-13
Need to reverse the order of these twa paragraphs
Figure 7-4.
Moving Paragraphs
1. Move the cursor to the “I” in “In spite of”.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“M”.
3. Choose “Within document”.
4. Move the cursor to the blank line after the paragraph. Press
“RETURN”,
5. Move the cursor to the “F” in “For example,”.
6. Press “RETURN”.
7. Adjust spacing, if necessary.
Copying Text Within a Document
Copying text within a document makes it easy to duplicate (or “boilerplate”)
paragraphs or sections you want to appear several times. You can make an
exact copy of text wherever you want and then make changes if necessary.
You can copy up to a total of 250 lines at once.
To copy text within a document:
1. Move the cursor to the first or last character of the information you want
to move.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”—“C” (for Copy).
7-14
wa
J ee |) i)
mw i ik Oak,
3. Choose “Within document”. Then ///E-Z Pieces presents the text in
zoomed-in format, so you can see all the cursor returns and printer options
in the text. That makes it easy for you to copy exactly what you want.
4. Move the cursor to the end or the beginning of the information you want
to copy. Then press “RETURN”.
5. Move the cursor to the place where you want to copy the information.
6. Press “RETURN” again. The information is copied.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
The Word Processor's move feature is similar to
the copy feature, except that when you move
information, you do not leave a copy in the origi-
nal place.
FINDING INFORMATION
///€-Z Pieces finds three types of information in your document for you:
— Text—words or phrases, usually—that you provide as comparison
information
— Aspecific page
— A marker, which identifies a certain spot in the document
This section provides information about the first two.
NOTE:
Finding markers is discussed in the next section,
“Using Markers.”
Finding Text
When you supply text for ///E-Z Pieces to find, ///E-Z Pieces begins
looking at the cursor position for the first occurence of the text, which can
be up to 30 characters long. Then you can ask for the next occurence, if you
want.
To find specific text:
1. Move the cursor to wherever you want /// E-Z Pieces to start search-
ing. (Remember you can easily get to the beginning of a document
with “OPEN-APPLE”-"1”.)
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“F” (for Find).
3. Choose “Text” to indicate you want to find specific text. If you have
already used find or replace, /// E-Z Pieces supplies the last found
or replaced text.
4. Type the text and press “RETURN”. /// E-Z Pieces moves the cursor
to the text and highlights it.
9. Choose “No” or “Yes”, depending on whether you want ///E-Z
Pieces to find the next occurence of the text.
Spaces at the beginning or end of the comparison information are part of the
text.
///€-Z Pieces keeps a record of the last text you asked it to find or replace
(OPEN-APPLE-“R”). When you ask to find text the next time, / / / E-Z Pieces
supplies the last found or replaced text as its best guess for what you want
this time. Press “RETURN” if you want to find the next occurence of this
same information. Or type new text and press “RETURN” if you want to find
different information.
For example,
If you last asked /// E-Z Pieces to
replace “29 giraffes” with
“30 elephants” “29 giraffes” will be the best
guess for the next find or replace.
///€-Z Pieces does not search through printer options for the information
you want, because printer options are not considered text.
If the text cannot be found, /// E-Z Pieces responds with “Not found, press
Space Bar to continue”.
Some Examples
Figure 7-6 shows text with several items of information found.
7-16
i
nl O6”!lUlUhL) Cia ae tests
igs ia
cg; Oe)
=
ia)
j
‘=
-
ial
The most papular form of cara
Pego'e® who never mich
and make spectac!es @ « EUR
delegates caucussing: in hote’ rooms. 53'*w
even right out on the convention floor.
Figure 7-6.
Finding Information
Here’s how to find the occurences of “caucussing”:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"F".
2. Choose “Text”.
3. Type “caucussing” and press “RETURN”. The cursor
moves to the first occurence of “caucussing”.
4. Choose “Yes” if you want to find the next occurence of
“caucussing”. “Caucussing” will be /// E-Z Pieces
best guess for your next find or replace.
Finding a Specific Page
To find a specific page, follow these steps:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"F".
2. Choose “Page”.
3. Type the page number and press “RETURN”.
RRR
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces starts searching for pages from
the beginning of the document. The cursor
moves to the first character on the page you
request.
To get to any page past 1, you must have already
calculated page numbers (OPEN-APPLE-“k”)
or printed the document (in which case / / / E-Z
Pieces automatically paginates the document).
ess ceclceeandnaiaiiasaaebao
Using Markers
Markers are places you identify in your document. They help you move the
cursor to specific places quickly. After you identify a place (or “set a
marker’), it’s easy to jump to that place (or “find a marker’).
Setting Markers
Follow these steps to set a marker:
1. Move the cursor to the place in the document where you want to set
the marker.
. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O” (for printer Options).
. Type “SM” (for Set Marker) and press “RETURN”,
. Type the number of the marker, “1”, “2”, or “3”, for example.
. Press ESCAPE.
nr W Pw
///E-Z Pieces Tips
The marker number can be any number between
1 and 254. That's probably enough!
Finding a Marker
Once you identify the spot by setting a marker, it's easy to jump to that spot
by asking ///E-Z Pieces to find the marker.
To find a marker:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“F”,
2. Choose “Marker”.
3. Type the number of the marker (‘1”, “2”, or “3”, for
example), and press “RETURN”,
7-18
=m mS SOS OOO OUeselrP
we
mm hU)COCST
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces starts searching for markers at
the beginning of the document.
Find Options for Printer
Finding printer options is much like finding other information in ///E-Z
Pieces. After pressing “OPEN-APPLE”-”F”, choose “O” and the list of printer
options will appear. Select the option you wish to find and press “RETURN”.
/// E-Z Pieces will find the next occurence of that option.
Using Tabs
Tabs are always noted by a vertical line in the dashed line across the top of
the display. Tabs let you control the movement of the cursor across a line.
New documents have tabs every five spaces. Using tabs involves setting and
clearing the tabs and then moving the cursor to the tabs.
Setting and Clearing Tabs
Here’s how to set and clear tabs.
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“T”. The cursor moves to the double line at
the top of the screen, where tabs are noted with a vertical line.
2. Use LEFT-ARROW and RIGHT-ARROW to move the cursor to
wherever you want to set or clear a tab. Type “S” to set atab or “C” to
clear a tab in that spot.
Or type “R” to remove all existing tabs.
3. Press ESCAPE when you are finished setting or clearing tabs.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Watch the column indicator as you are setting
tabs.
Moving the Cursor to Tabs
To move the cursor to tabs, just press “TAB”. Use “OPEN-APPLE”-“TAB’" to
move the cursor to the previous tab.
7-19
Semen gees
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Set tabs for formatting columns within text
Sees
Changing the Name of your File
Here’s how to change the name of your file:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“N”.
2. Type the new name of the file. The name can be up to 15 characters
long. It must start with a letter, and it can contain upper- and lower-
case letters, numbers, spaces, and periods. Then press “RETURN”.
Se
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces changes the name of the file on
the desktop. When you save the file, it is saved
with the new name. That means you still have the
file under its old name, if it is an old file. You may
want to delete the file from the disk under its old
name.
Changing the name of the file is one way to keep
several copies of the same file and make sure
you know the difference between them.
es
7-20
Lh
;
ia
as
Chapter 8
Formatting a Word Processor Document
Sample DOCUMENES. 6:60 vos csc cise caceie were wee ene mee Ome cme seme es we 8-2
Using the Word Processor’s Printer OptionS.........0e+eeeee eens 8-6
What Are Printer Options «sok vice ces cee vee tee cee coe wee mee ee we 8-6
Zooming In on Printer OptiOnS........ ccc cece cree eee ene eeee 8-6
Changing Printer Options ........cccsced tea eev cece cee veens 8-8
/// €-Z Pieces’ Best Guesses for Main Printer Options...... 8-9
Controlling Horizontal Spacing .........ceceeeeee rece reeneeeees 8-9
Platert WIG css sacs wes wesw wae wan com wee Ra ee Oot eae Elk bee Ee 8-9
Lett MAQOIT 5 es esa was escow gain com ears cine pews cree mae Mare Hom HN Be 8-10
RIGNt MAGI xa ces cass tee Gon oom C08 on Hew Hoe cals me wea GOD aie 8-10
Controlling Print Density .. 0. cos cai dine cabs vee Hie sew ws 6 oie Ho 0 8-11
Controlling Vertical Spacing ........ccs cee eee cee cee cen Seu eee ee 8-12
Paper LOT th a.sxcsos cons coin cow bed thd Reven Geld EON She COS TRG ONE FS 8-12
TOD Mar GIN ss cass ceca come core eee ee eee ee Oe Cem HEA Kad Kine waee Bs 8-12
Bottom Margin........ Sos KOR wa wngA beRe MOR BEES wos enee week BM wd 8-13
Single, Double, and Triple Spacing... .......... cc eee eee e eee 8-13
Lites Per IGH iv cic ton 26% bes wary Hs 200 cas cee Hee Foy Hee we 8-13
SKIDDING LIMOS... cos coe Hos vind ESET Uae Go's HOW BEB Was BER WoM ware es 8-14
Gontraling: | BVGUE cae wns wad Sad hedee wee Sed OOS HSN EG Rees Res I 8-14
Making Hanging Paragraphs and Bullets (Indenting) ........ 8-14
Justifying, Unjustifying, and Centering ............eeeeeeees ‘8-16
Using Page Headers and Footers.........sceeeee cree ceeeees 8-17
Using Special Printing Techniques ......... cere cece eee eennes 8-19
Using Boldface and Underlining ...........es cece eee eeeeees 8-19
Using Superscripts and Subscripts .........-. sees eee e ee ees 8-20
Using Sticky Spaces 2. ween ore cid since ew nee Kae a sins O45 ERE HOS | 8-21
Controlling Paging and Page Numbers ..........sseee eee eee eees 8-21
Calculating Page NUMDEIrS 2.4 65 666 ces wien cee cee mee eee cee 8-22
Specifying a New Page 2... ic. cee vou eee cae tees cee wae wee wee 8-22
Specifying “Groups” of Information .......... eee eee eeeeees 8-23
NUMbBELING PAGES... «<5 sxe Kee 605 es Hos HERE Haw HOW Ber Has DAD 8-24
Printing Page NUMbEers..........ceeceenneeseceeeeeeesnees 8-24
Typing Information from the Keyboard ......... cece ee ee eens 8-25
8-1
Formatting a Word Processor document involves using printer options:
— Tocontrol horizontal spacing
— Tocontrol density of printing
— Tocontrol vertical spacing
— Tocontrol layout, such as handling paragraphs and headers and
footers
— Tousespecial printing techniques, such as boldface and underlining
— Tocontrol paging
— To provide information from the keyboard during printing
Sample Documents
Take a look at several sample documents to get an idea of some of /// E-Z
Pieces’ features for formatting Word Processor documents. The file contain-
ing the sample document in Figure 8-1 is called “Tower of Mammon.” The
file is on the sample files disk. You can display or print it if you want. The
settings of certain printing format options are as follows
Platen width = 8 inches
Left margin = 1 inch
Right margin = 1 inch
Characters per inch = 10
Right margin is unjustified.
Page length = 11 inches
Top margin = 1 inch
Bottom margin = 2 inches
Lines per inch =6
Single spacing
Superscript
E
E:
7
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
BE
E
BE
—
E
?
?
,
>
.
©
7
-
+
4
‘
5
:
.
:
a
‘
»
b
=
Subjects Tilt in the Tower ot Mammon
Tos Nicholas Beelzebub, Comm:ssioner, Internai
Works
From: Pontius Pilate, Superintendent, Buridings and
Grounds
Date: 13 July 1973
Measurements contirm aur citizens impression that the Tower of
Mammon is tilting. Immediate relocation ot the gold bu'iion
reserves to the west wing of the tower i¢ the best tirst step toward
a solution.
The Tower of Mammon now leans eastward 5S degrees trom the vertical,
The tilt is progressing at an estimated 0.1 deqrees per vear,
Toppling will occur im appproximately 400 years.
As the Pisan architects in Buildings and Grounds can state trom
previous experience, instability in the toundation soil at the east
of the tower is the main cause of the tilt. In addition, a
significant contributing factor ts the concentration ot the gold
bullion reserves in the tower s east wing. Support for this
explanation lies in the observations +1) that tne Styx River vs
gradually edging westward toward the tower ang ‘2: tnat the
temperature rise of the toundatian soi} trom the west tace to the
east face of the tower is nearly 200° F,
A studs’ of the possibility at giverting the Sts merits
implementation and may vield a long-term remedy. Advertising the
tower as a tourist attraction and charging admissions tees coulo
provide funds for this study. To check ano perhaps reverse the
tilt, the only practical solution immediately available 1s to shift
the bullion to the west wing. The temperature-r:se problem,
however, seems at present insolubie; it 16 an aspect af our
environment ¢ basic thermal problem, which as you know hat thus tar
resisted solution despite our most strenuous eftorts,
Figure 8-1.
Tower of Mammon Document
Figure 8-2. shows a page of a more formal document with several special
formatting techniques. The file containing this document is “Qualifications”
on the sample files disk. The settings of certain printing format options are
as follows:
Platen width = 8 inches
Left margin = .5 inch
Right margin = 1 inch
Characters per inch = 12
Right margin is justified.
Page length = 11 inches
Top margin = 1 inch
Bottom margin = 1 inch
Lines per inch = 6
Single spacing
Bullets
Page header
Page footer with page number
meee Oe oe oe om
a a ee ESSEC SS Se
ial
STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 FOREWORD
Gur Company (OC) 1s a division of The Big Company, Inc. (TBCI) and its
primary business iS providing engineering consulting services for the
development of computer-based supervisory cantral and data acquisition
systems. TBC] staff members have been leaders in the control system field
over the past 20 years. TBC] staff also have experience in planning and
development large systems that require computers for information management
and engineering planning and design.
TBC] is uniquely qualified to supply consult:ng services for these types of
computer-based systems projects for the following reasons;
Key personnel have successtully completed projects that embrace
every discipline and technological area required of
computer-based process control systems and information
management systems.
TEC] staff ais have experience im research and development
projects that use computer-based systems to assist in analysis
ot research efforts including:
. Intelligent information retrieva!
Computer system architecture
Distributed decision making
Members of the staff are ackncwledged leaders in the
supervisory control and energy management system fields.
TBC] organizes and communicates information according to
industry standards in order to maximize its usefulness for TBCI
clients,
1.2 ORGAN] 2ATION
TBC] corporate headquarters office is located in Cupertino, California, Its
projects are managed by a Senor Consultant who may be a specialist in one
or more of the technical disciplines included in the total Computer-based
contro! system. The Project Manager is assisted as required by other TBCI
statf members, who are specialists in compiementary technical disciplines,
Figure 8-2.
Qualifications Document
8-5
Using the Word Processor’s Printer Options
This section defines the Word Processor’s printer options and tells how to
change them. It also discusses ///E-Z Pieces’ best guesses for the main
printer options.
What are Printer Options?
“Printer Options” are specifications that control the format of your docu-
ment and how its prints. Some printer options control all following text, such
as margins; spacing; whether text should be justified, unjustified, or cen-
tered. These options remain in effect in your document until you change
them. Single spacing remains in effect, for example, until the point where
you change the spacing to double or triple. Margins stay the same until the
point where you change them. And text is justified until you specify that you
want it unjustified or centered. Thus you may have different margins and
spacing in the same document, as well as justified, unjustified, and centered
text.
Other options stay in effect in your document until you end them or until the
end of the paragraph or line they’re in, whichever is sooner. For example,
text is underlined until you stop the underlining or until the end of the
paragraph. The same goes for boldface. Superscripting and subscripting
stop automatically at the end of the current line.
Still other printer options communicate information to the printer. For
example, Skip Lines tells the printer to skip a number of lines you specify;
Enter Keyboard tells the printer to stop at this point so you can type
information from the keyboard.
///€-Z Pieces’ printer options give you a great deal of control over printing
your documents.
Zooming In on Printer Options
Any time you want to see the text marked with printer options, zoom in. To
do so, press “OPEN-APPLE”-“Z”.
When you press “OPEN-APPLE”-“Z” while looking at the Qualifications
Document, for example, the display looks like Figure 8-3.
i
I |
rm
—
ial
mm
mm tf
Left margin is 1.0 inches
Information will be unjustified.
The beginning of a group of information that shouldn't be split
by the end of the page
Text that follows should be indented, for bulleted items.
Carriage returns are marked by backslashes
Figure 8-3.
Zoomed In “Qualifications”
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor through the document, so you can
see the printer options. The only ones you see, though, are the ones added
or changed from /// E-Z Pieces’ best guesses. You can see // / E-Z Pieces’
best guesses by using the “OPEN-APPLE’-"O” feature, described next.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can use all the Word Processor’s features
while you are zoomed out or in. Zoom in to keep
track of printer options while you are working
with a document.
Changing Printer Options
Follow these steps to change printer options:
1. Put the cursor where you want the printer option to
take effect. If you want an option to apply to your entire
document, press “OPEN-APPLE”-"1” to get to the top
of the document.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O” (for Options).
///€-Z Pieces displays the text in zZoomed-in format and the list of printer
options. It asks you which option you want to change, as Figure 8-4
illustrates.
List of printer options
Code that stands for the option
Options are grouped by function.
Main printer options in effect right now. You can always find out the current
values for the main printer options by checking this display.
Mark
& 3et a2 er
BE: Boldtece Begin
Figure 8-4.
Printer Options
3. Type the code that stands for the printer option you want to change
or start using. Then press “RETURN”.
8-8
wr
TE TS SF LT ee = ce
ial
Ww
am th
—~ om =
rey
ia
re
ia} Li
ind
i-}
ind
re)
ind
'*
ie
Lad
we
ka
4. Type the new value if /// E-Z Pieces asks for one. If the value is a
whole number, such as 1 inch or 2 inches, you don’t have to type the
decimal.Then press “RETURN”.
5. Change more printer options, if you want.
6. Press “ESCAPE?” after you finish.
While you are working with printer options, / / / E-Z Pieces displays the text
in zoomed-in format, so you can see the printer options as you add or
change them.
///€-Z Pieces’ Best Guesses for Main Printer Options
The following are /// E-Z Pieces’ best guesses for the main printer
options. These printer options and their best guesses are in effect for all
new documents. You can change them if you want a different value:
— Platen width = 8.0 inches
— Left Margin = 1.0 inches
— Right Margin = 1.0 inches
— Characters per inch = 10
— Text is unjustified.
— Paper length = 11 inches
— Top margin = 0 inches
— Bottom Margin = 2 inches
— Lines per inch =6
— Single Spacing
These options are described in the sections that follow.
Controlling Horizontal Spacing
Table 8-1. lists the three printer options that control horizontal spacing.
The Printer Option: Controls
Platen width (PW) The distance in inches
the printer’s printhead
travels across the paper.
The left edge of the paper
should correspond to where the
printhead stops on the left.
This number can be no greater
than the printer’s platen width you
8-9
ud
specify in “Other Activities” Menu
option “Specify information about
your printer(s)”.
Controlling Print Density
You can control print density by choosing to print from 4 through 24
characters per inch depending on the capability of your printer. Then you
ef
Best guess = 8.0 inches
The maximum you can use is 13.2 ~ print nonproportionally. That is, all letters take up the same amount of
inches. space: whether they are narrow, like i’s, or wide, like m’s.
Left margin (LM) bee width of the left margin in - You may also choose to print proportionally, again depending on the
inches
capability of your printer. Then narrow and wide letters take up narrow
and wide spaces. I's take up narrow spaces and m’s take up wide spaces.
RORST ee? Mae Tears 0 Table 8-2 shows the number of proportional spacing types on various
inches, that is, 1.5 inches, 1.6
il
inches. printers.
Best guess = 1.0 inches s ene are unsure of how your printer will treat a specific print density, try
The maximum you can use is 9.0 sluniberar Peniortional
inches. .
a = Printer Spacing Types
Right Margin (RM) The width of the right margin Apple Dot Matrix 5
in inches
| a Apple Daisy Wheel {
Numbers may be in tenths of Other Daisy Wheel yEniaa
inches, that is, 1.5 inches, 1.6 Other Dot Matrix varie
inches. ?
= Silentype 0
Best guess = 1.0 inches
a
The maximum you can use is | Table 8-2.
9.0 inches. Printers and Proportional Spacing Types
a To change the print density:
Table 8-1.
1, Put the cursor where you want the new print density to start. Put
the cursor at the beginning of the document if you are changing
from ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess, 10 characters per inch, to a new
one for the whole document.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”,
Printer Options for Horizontal Spacing
..zontal spacing is also controlled by print density.
NOTE:
For more information on print density, see
“Controlling Print Density” in this chapter.
=m mh wm om Fo om ow om ow
3. Type “P1” or “P2” and “RETURN” if you are choosing a propor-
tional printing style, or type “C1” and “RETURN” if you want to
figure out the width of your text:
RHEE ee par J change the characters per inch value.
rm
in}
Platen Width For example: 8.0 inches
Left margin - 1.5 inches a hn con new value, from 4 through 24, and press
- Right margin - 1.0. inches ‘
= Text Width = 5.5 inches 4. Press “ESCAPE”.
ix
5
es Limi
8-11
it you choose a print density your printer doesn’t have, /// E-Z Pieces
uses the next higher one. When in doubt, try it out!
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Each of these different print densities affects
the display of your document. The print den-
sity you select remains in effect until you
change it within your document.
Occasionally you may decide to change the
print density within a document. For example,
you may print a letterhead at 10 characters per
inch and then print the text of the letter at 12
characters per inch. P1 and P2 don't work well
with tabular information.
NOTE:
See “Viewing Your Document.”
Controlling Vertical Spacing
The eight printer options that control vertical spacing are listed in
Table 8-4.
The Printer Option Controls
Paper length (PL)
Top margin (TM)
Best guess = 11 inches
The maximum you can use is 25.4
inches.
printing.
8-12
The vertical measurement of the
paper you are using, in inches.
The length in inches from the top
of the paper to the first line of
ys - wm Mm
ual
wm tb
.
=
is)
Bottom margin (BM)
Single, double and triple
spacing (SS, DS, and TS)
Lines per inch (LI)
Best guess = 0.0 inches.
This best guess accommodates
///€-Z Pieces users who have
sheet feed printers (printers with
no tractor). If you have one of
these printers, you should leave
the best guess at 0 and position
the paper exactly where you want
the first line to be.
///€-Z Pieces users with tractor
feed printers will probably want to
change this value.
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
The length in inches from the last
line of printing to the bottom of
the paper
Best guess = 2.0 inches
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
Whether the information is single,
double, or triple spaced. Only one
of these, the last one specified,
can be in effect.
You can change the spacing
whenever you want within a
document.
Best guess is single spacing.
Displayed lines are single spaced.
Double and triple spacing takes
effect when you print.
How many lines will be printed
per vertical inch on the page.
Best guess = 6
You can use 6 or 8.
8-13
The number of lines the printer
should leave blank at this point.
Use this option to leave space for
illustrations.
Skipping lines (SK)
The most lines you can skip is the
number it takes to make a page
Table 8-4.
Printer Options for Vertical Spacing
Use the following formula to figure out the length of your text:
Paper length For example: 11.0 inches
- Top Margin - 1.5 inches
Bottom Margin ~ 1.5 inches
- Text Width = 8.0 inches
Controlling Layout
///€-Z Pieces offers you a number of ways to control layout:
— Hanging paragraphs and bullets
— Justification
— Page headers and footers
This section tells you how to use them.
Making Hanging Paragraphs and Bullets (indenting)
Hanging paragraphs and bulleted items may sound violent, but they're
used frequently in business documents. The first line of hanging para-
graphs begins at the left margin and succeeding lines are indented. The
numbered steps in this manual are hanging paragraphs. And here are
other examples of hanging paragraphs (and not necessarily of good
English!):
Reserve the apostrophe for it’s proper use
and omit it when its not needed.
Place pronouns as close as possible, especially
in long sentences, as of 10 or more words, to
their antecedents.
8-14
we
Cn
ESS EO ee ee eee ee eee eee
-
in} 6 C6kd)lCOtsénsLn
ini 60S lik) Clk) tsk
lms
If you reread your work, you will find on
rereading that a great deal of repetition can be
avoided by rereading and editing.
The first line of bulleted items have an “o” or another letter or a number
in the left margin, and succeeding lines are indented. Here are some
examples of bulleted items (and again, not necessarily of good English):
e Being moribund on arrival at the hospital, the doctor
could do nothing for the patient.
e His pelvis was fractured by being thrown from an
automobile.
e There were four deaths, only one of which lived
more than two months.
To create hanging paragraphs and bulleted items with /// E-Z Pieces:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”,
2. The first line of the hanging paragraph or bulleted item is
the left margin of the document. Change the left margin
temporarily if you want the paragraphs or items to start
further to the right than the rest of the document. You may
want to change the right margin, too, to make the bulleted
items narrower than the rest of the document.
3. Type “IN” (for INdent) and press “RETURN”.
4. Type a number to specify the number of spaces you want
succeeding lines to be indented. Then press “RETURN”,
5. Press “ESCAPE”.
Now begin typing the hanging paragraphs and bulleted items. When you
type the bulleted items, type the “o” (or “*” or “-”) at the left margin. Then
space over (or tab) to where you want to start typing. Beginning with the
second line, lines will be indented the number of spaces you request in
step 4. Figure 8-5 shows a display with indenting commands and text.
8-15
Files: Qualys be tcati PREV LEW a D0) Co Hee
Lett Ma Ad ths
“Riaht Ma .
a nt: S. chai rs
hey personne? 1
thar ae: LF] ’
area rec '
Figure 8-5.
Indented Text
After you finish typing the hanging paragraphs or bulleted items, follow
these steps:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O” again.
2. Type “IN” and press “RETURN”.
3. Type “O” and press “RETURN”. You are un-indenting by changing
the value of “INdent” to 0.
4. Reset margins you changed previously.
5. Press “ESCAPE”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you indent while using proportional
printing or justification, each indented space is
the width of a0. You can indent up to 64 spaces
(which equals 64 0's).
Justifying, Unjustifying, and Centering
Text is either justified, unjustified, or centered. Figure 8-6 illustrates all
three.
8-16
™
ee ee oS oe oom ow
a i lf
“=
——«
sa aa
=
=~
}
Hump t ¥ Dumeo t+ exDper,enced a rather substant; al
diminution in the maagnitude of the coordinates of His
vertical elevation as measured skywicsce from an origin
coincident with the surface component of the terres
firma in this planetary body.
Humpty Dumpt>s experiencec a rather substantial
diminution in the magnitude af the coordinates of Fiji:
Vertical elevation as measured skewise from an arigi
ceGcincidgent with the surface campanent af the terra
firma in this Golantetare bady,
Humets Dumpty experienced a rather SUS tan She
diminution in the magnitude af the ena ot Ris
Wertical elevation +5 messtured sKiat Se from an origin
cojmcident with the surface component of the terrs
fiema in th, pBianetary
Figure 8-6.
Justified, Unjustified, and Centered Text
Whichever option of these three is in effect remains until you select another
one. For example, if you choose “centered” for headers, you will probably
want to change to “justified” or “unjustified” for the text.
To change these options:
1. Put the cursor on the line where you want the change to take effect.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
3. Type the option you want: “UJ” for unjustified, “JU” for justified, or
“CN” for centered. Then press “RETURN”.
4. Press “ESCAPE”.
Using Page Headers and Footers
You can put a one-line page header at the top of each page. /// E-Z Pieces
prints the page header on the first printing line after the top margin. Then it
skips two lines and begins to print the text.
And you can put a one-line page footer at the bottom of each page. ///E-Z
Pieces prints the page footer on the last printing line before the bottom
margin. It skips two lines between the last line of the text and the page footer.
Figure 8-7 shows several examples of page headers and footers.
8-17
Figure 8-7.
Headers and Footers
Here’s how to specify page headers and footers:
1. Position the cursor correctly for the header or footer. The page
header printer option must be on the top line of the page where you
want the headers to start. The page footer printer option can be
anywhere on the page where you want the footers to start.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-"O".
3. Type “HE” for a header or “FO” for a footer and press “RETURN”.
4. Press “ESCAPE”.
5. Type the header or footer as if you were typing a line of text. The line
that follows the “------ -- Page Header” or “-------- Page Footer” nota-
tion becomes the header or footer.
Any page header or footer you specify prints at the top or bottom of each
page until you change it.
To cause page headers and footers to stop, follow the page heacer or footer
printer option with a blank line.
8-18
em m= mé m
i
ag;
ial
ia]
imi = loi) COG) Ckc)t‘éks J
|
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Before you set up page headers or footers, calcu-
late page numbers with “OPEN-APPLE’-“k”.
Use the Print Page No. (PP) printer option to get
page numbers on headers or footers.
Page header and footer printer options display in
the zoomed-out and zoomed-in text, but they
don’t print.
NOTE:
See “Printing Page Numbers” for information on
how to get page numbers into headers and
footers.
Using Special Printing Techniques
Special printing techniques let you use
— Boldface
— Underlining
— Subscripts
— Superscripts
— Sticky Spaces
Using Boldface and Underlining
To specify boldface and underlining:
1. Put the cursor on the first character to be boldfaced or underlined.
2. Press “CONTROL"-“B” or “CONTROL”-“L”.
///€-Z Pieces inserts a caret (“"”) right before the first boldfaced or under-
lined character. All succeeding characters are boldfaced or underlined until
you either stop the boldfacing or underlining or the paragraph ends.
To stop the boldfacing and underlining:
1. Put the cursor on the character or space just past those to be
boldfaced or underlined.
2. Press “CONTROL”-“B” or “CONTROL”-"L”.
8-19
-
///€-Z Pieces inserts a caret ) right after the last boldfaced or under-
lined character.
When you want to find out what the carets mean, move the cursor to each
one. Depending on the meaning of the caret, “Boldface Begin”, “Boldfa-
ceEnd”, “Underline Begin”, or “Underline End” highlights at the bottom of
the screen.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
To shortcut the printer options when you want to
underline or boldface text, use these special
commands:
— Use CONTROL and “B” to begin and end
boldface.
— Use CONTROL and “L” to begin and end
underlining.
CONTROL-“B” and CONTROL-“L” either start
or stop boldface and underlining, depending on
what's in effect when you use each. They display
the carets, also.
Using Superscripts and Subscripts
To specify text for superscripts and subscripts:
1. Put the cursor on the first character to the superscripted or
subscripted.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"O".
3. Type “+B” for Superscript Begin or “-B” for Subscript Begin. Then
press “RETURN”. |
4. Press “ESCAPE”.
cA
///€-Z Pieces inserts a caret (“"”’) right before the first superscripted or
subscripted character. All succeeding characters are superscripted or sub-
scripted until you either stop the superscripting or subscripting or the
current line ends.
8-20
= eS SS eo
r Oe
i
,
au Ww mw Ww tt
ca) ddl
ig!
in} 606i] hl
To stop superscripting or subscripting:
1. Put the cursor on the character or space just past those to be
superscripted or subscripted.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
3. Type “+E” for Superscript End or “-E” for Subscript End. Then press
“RETURN”.
4. Press “ESCAPE”.
///€-Z Pieces inserts a caret (“"”) right after the last superscripted or
subscripted character. When you want to find out what the carets mean,
move the cursor to each one. Depending on the meaning of the caret,
“Superscript Begin”, “Superscript End”, “Subscript Begin”, or “Subscript
End” highlights at the bottom of the screen.
Using Sticky Spaces
“Sticky spaces” are spaces between words or groups of characters. But
unlike regular spaces, which come between words or groups of characters
that can be separated at the end of a line, sticky spaces come between
words or groups of characters that may not be broken at the end of a line.
For example, suppose the name “Gerhard P.T. Hakelfinger” occurs in your
text and you don’t want the name split. Just use a sticky space between the
parts of the name instead of a regular space. (Of course, word wraparound
could cause the name to start on a line following a very short line!)
To insert a sticky space, press “OPEN-APPLE”-“SPACE” bar. ///E-Z
Pieces inserts a caret, which signifies the sticky space.
Controlling Paging and Page Numbers
To control paging and page numbers,
— Calculate page numbers
— Specify a new page
— Specify groups of information
— Number pages
— Print page numbers
8-21
Calculating Page Numbers
When ///E-Z Pieces calculates page numbers, it breaks pages approp-
riately and assigns page numbers to the pages. ///E-Z Pieces follows
several rules when it calculates page numbers:
— ///€-Z Pieces won't break paragraphs so that one line of the para-
graph is split from the rest of the paragraph. The beginning of a
paragraph on one page must have at least two lines, or that text goes
to the top of the next page. Similarly, at least two lines of a paragraph
must be at the top of the following page.
— ///€E-Z Pieces won't overrule page breaks you specify.
— If you specify that a group of information shouldn’t be broken,
///€E-Z Pieces won't break it.
lf you don’t care what happens to the page breaks, go ahead and print the
document. ///E-Z Pieces will calculate page numbers and page your
document according to its rules. It will also mark the file with page breaks.
The next time you display your document, you see page breaks as perfo-
rated lines across the display.
lf you do care what happens to page breaks, follow these steps:
1. After you have typed the document and before youprint it, press
“OPEN-APPLE”-“K” (for Calculate).
2. Choose “Beginning” if you want to calculate page numbers from the
beginning of the document. Choose “This page” if you want to
calculate from the page the cursor is on. (If you haven't calculated
yet, choose “Beginning”.)
3. Choose the printer you want to calculate for.
Now you can look at page breaks by moving the cursor through the
document.
If you make any changes to text after calculating page numbers, page
breaks go away. Then you should calculate new ones.
Specifying a New Page
You may want to control page breaks yourself. If you do, use the New Page
feature:
1. Put the cursor on the line that should be at the top of a new page.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
8-22
rm! eee ee Oe OU Of
NN ES 7 as Gi
3. Type “NP” and press “RETURN”.
4. Press “ESCAPE”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Ordinarily you won't use the new page feature,
but you'll use the other paging features (/ / / E-Z
Pieces’ rules and grouped information) and the
“OPEN-APPLE”-“L” feature to control paging.
The primary use of the New Page feature Is to
allow you to make sure titles go at the top of a
new page.
///E-Z Pieces won't overrule these page breaks
but it will break pages between your page breaks
if the text between them is longer than one page.
If you specify a new page in the middle of a
paragraph, ///E-Z Pieces puts the page break
before the paragraph. To get a new page in the
middle of a paragraph, you have to break the
paragraph yourself by inserting a carriage return
where you want the paragraph to break before
you use the new page option.
Specifying “Groups” of Information
When you particularly want to keep a chunk of information together, so that
///E-Z Pieces won't break it up between pages, you can “group” it. Here are
some examples of information you may want to group:
— The introductory sentence and the bulleted items that follow
— Thetitle and the first paragraph of information in asubsection of text
— Items in a list
To do so, follow these steps:
1. Put the cursor on the first line of the group.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“O".
3. Type “GB” and press “RETURN”.
4. Put the cursor on the line following the last line of the group.
8-23
5. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
6. Type “GE” and press “RETURN”.
Numbering Pages
You can control page numbering yourself by overriding ///E-Z Pieces’
page numbers. When you want to control page numbers, you assign a page
number to a specific page. That page and all pages that follow are numbered
accordingly.
TO assign a page number:
— Putthe cursor somewhere on the page you want to assign a number
to.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
3. Type “PN” and press “RETURN”.
4. Type the number of the page up to 254. Then press “RETURN”.
Printing Page Numbers
You can cause page numbers to print on a page, either the numbers / / / E-Z
Pieces calculates or those you assign. Page numbers can be printed in the
header, the footer, and the text.
For example, you might want the page number to print within a footer or
within a header, as Figure 8-8 illustrates.
Fage 35
Summar
Within a footer
Within a header
Figure 8-8.
Page Numbers Within Headers and Footers
8-24
i |)
—-——_——_—_——— eee nn” wwe ss EE ees eee ee
—_ a ee eye es ee
/
mmm we
we
To cause page numbers to print:
1. Put the cursor wherever you want the page number to print. Most
likely it will be in the line following “-------- Page Header” or “--------
Page Footer”.
2. Type “Page” if you want that word to precede the page number.
Then press SPACE bar once.
3. Press “OPEN-APPLE"-"O".
4. Type “PP” and press “RETURN”. ///E-Z Pieces inserts a caret in.
that space. When you put the cursor on the caret, “Print Page No.”
displays at the bottom of the screen.
Typing Information from the Keyboard
You can ask the printer to stop during printing so that you can type informa-
tion directly from the keyboard into the document. This feature is very useful
when you want to personalize letters, for example, by putting the recipient's
name in occasionally.
To enter information from the keyboard:
1. Put the cursor in the place in the document where typed information
will go.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”’-“O".
3. Type “EK” and press “RETURN”.
// /€-Z Pieces inserts a caret into the text where the value will go. When you
put the cursor on the caret, “Enter Keyboard” displays at the bottom of the
screen.
When you print the document, the printer stops at the specified spot and
waits for you to type information. The printer starts printing again when you
press “RETURN”.
An Example
The printer will stop twice while it prints this line:
“Please remember, *, that this offer is good only until ©.
The first time the printer stops, you type the person’s name. The second
time, you type the final day of your latest offer.
8-25
me Te ee
Chapter 9
Understanding the Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet's Two Main Functions............... | herders we 9-1
PGI POW 2:0:6:0:0:4:09098:5:5544FS ESOT TRRSG TESS ERS ERE RAM SEA ERA Kaa oo 9-2
PS AUS IS i weary aes 8 SSA GSE Adc w ren wecnemm meme acem Sam hem witin wate alors 9-3
///€-Z Pieces’ Spreadsheet allows you to work with numbers you usually
write in rows and columns. The Spreadsheet’s calculation techniques let
you speculate and forecast, changing numbers and immediately see the
effect of the changes.
This chapter discusses the Spreadsheet’s two main functions, illustrates its
flow of activities, and discusses its file guidelines.
The Spreadsheet’s Two Main Functions
The Spreadsheet's activities have two main functions, as Figure 9-1 illus-
trates. The first function, working with information in worksheets, allows
you to create worksheets with numbers or formulas so you can stay on top
of current situations and project the effect of future changes. The second
function, reporting, lets you create hard copies of your information, format-
ted to your specifications.
When you create a worksheet, you can type several basic formulas and then
use the Spreadsheet’s Copy feature to put the same or similar formulas in
other areas of the worksheet. You can control the way numbers in separate
areas of the worksheet are displayed and look at the worksheet from differ-
ent, viewpoints, for complete flexibility in number manipulation. It’s easy,
too, to make changes to worksheets at any time, for even more flexibility.
When you create reports with the Spreadsheet, you can specify exactly what
information you want to print and format the information on the page
exactly the way you want it. Then you can print it on a printer or on the
clipboard for inclusion in a Word Processor document.
9-1
SPREADSHEET
IN WORKSHEETS
WORKING WITH INFORMATION
IN WORKSHEETS
CREATE WORKSHEET
INPUT VALUES/LABELS/FORMULAS
COPY ENTRIES
CALCULATE/DISPLAY RESULTS
EDIT/CHANGE/EXPERIMENT
Figure 9-1.
Spreadsheet’s Two Main Functions
Activity Flow
Figure 9-2 shows the flowchart of activities when you are using Spreadsheet
files. All the activities fall into Review/Add/Change.
WORKSHEET FOR REPORTS
EDIT/EXPERIENCE
RECALCULATE/REDISPLAY
OUTPUT RESULTS
Figure 9-2.
Spreadsheet Flowchart
9-2
re
rw)
eo om oo
ee la a a aa
File Guidelines
Spreadsheet files can contain 127 columns and 999 rows, for a maximum
total of 126,873 empty “cells”.
For filled cells, the following guidelines apply:
“For an Apple computer with
128K RAM” About 3100 filled cells maximum
“For an Apple Computer with
256K RAM” About 11,000 filled cells
maximum
Rows are numbered from 1 through 999. Columns are denoted as follows:
A through Z
AA through AZ
BA through BZ
CA through CZ
DA through DW
9-3
ee
So Ss os CS 6 ee Ge
al
Chapter 10
Working With Information in Worksheets
MWaRITIG S. WOTKSNGGT « cas ces was Kee 6 eee Gem RK EP E58 Kee Wee Hee Bes 10-3
Planning a NEW WOrKSRESE .... nies acces moa ied Gas M08 KRG HON FER WES 10-3
What: Answers DO "YOU WANET . occse coun ccone care esis wee cme weld Brees 10-6
What Values Produce the AnswerS? .........sseeeeeweeees 10-6
What Formulas Make the Values Produce the Answers? .... 10-6
What Should Your Worksheet Look Like? ..............0548. 10-7
Greating the Workshe@et as cas fa5 teas cee 068 Hale Kew EX SHES BOs BN 10-8
PROT SOUAIGN « saw BOE KES BSR EAN ESS $4558 ERG GOS HOE EVE ROR OR CS 10-9
Pe CAL TERE ice Gos Mie cle nee co vteem Sol Gk EOS bee ERS ES 10-10
EH USHER TG: PTLEIS uc Sim seh idee Stew caer ee cae teen Se OE 10-10
Working With Worksheet Standard Values ...........c eee eee ees 10-11
Details About Worksheet Standard Values ...............00.. 10-13
Walia: FOTTIOIS! cog ccs Bid wee FES HES BEEK HRW Hs O58 Bat Ben Ben 10-14
Liatiel FONAS six cos ces 065 HOG bes HE OSs HOS ERS Bem KeS FES Ra 10-15
CAF, PUTTS one ecack cod iv ESR BEA RASS ERG GRE ERE EK GG ES 10-15
RN eee i os ae ek tile ale abc: oles wo Bh bee oe pt 10-15
PRMD TR iisn dem tedh ESN een Hae ace eettioet Gee ew GR eo Nea aes 10-16
Checking Standard Valuesiin Effect ccs ccs coe cue craw vom ea win 10-16
Changing Worksheet Standard ValueS........... 0. cee e ee ees 10-17
TYDING aha. Eqitinig INTOrnauonl ces wes ges 250 Gees Hos sais 408 Kew Beg 10-18
TE¥GInG EMSS: 2is.x ses ea OR HER HSS HSS SE DEEN Oy Kee ERE HS OOD 10-18
ld Frits: edie a eets ed wick Raw ates Aa MeN Bl Gad Bd SS WE BES 10-18
LORE ENEES yy secs wtev ection ion wice teat Sate thames lle sveticn Win cold int teem tne 10-19
LISiNG VINES: s cen wes acme coe nee eek REA KO Ow wed ERS CON COM Oe oe 10-20
REURTIOGRES ie: nid ws Gate cow othe Be REE te Eee Name oe ee hee Boe dee 10-20
POINGIS 4 cas Kis wes 868-4 HRS Hele Eww ESS Rive Dew News OG EOE WON OG BA 10-21
PONGCIONS 2s Sa5 Ran BEER Bed KON BOR RSW Res O24 BeOS Oed ee oe OG we 10-22
AFTRMiStic FUNCTORS osc cea a5% WEG GR HER SG FUR GE OS GSE 10-24
I re 6 eset Wank hod tune WES Glad Gebel Gens Hh walk 10-24
REM LTINES biptt. elbiicsesellnl sta: eneidt Seal iil ‘oliloe Shnsild-inetncvAindl meet teacts ale 10-24
VWVEMOHEATCUINOTIES ins can see U0 0nd Kem name HOR OO RO 10-25
By Selecting Alternatives . 2.0... ccc c cece eee cee cee wee 10-25
Pinenicial PUNnChONS: css wes 60s ces Hed eS Baw eee HeeN EWE Be 10-26
Logical FOARCIONE GOLF 's cas v5 eee wes wes F x0 00% 5 45s KOK 80 10-27
Pte. nek WER RAR ESD ESl ESL ESE ERS KGS BSG OR ee BK Ges CESS 10-28
Moving the Cursor Within a Worksheet ............ cere rene eee 10-30
WEG We GWG LAO nee ncien Gh win nas te wed te es eee 10-31
Details ADORE Gell LAYOUTS! 5 cca aes ean ee hee eee we eoNCED ems 10-32
Wal POTTS 5 cure cae peg ceed cow Hs boS G09 Mes oe BON CO 10-32
Le6l PORTAUS as cos wes nae O66 % Has FA ROW Bee HEE cae red wE HEED 10-34
Colin Widths® « cou wes cee ees e5 OOS ew Res Ws DaG Ra das wR 10-34
PROTON, cod ives BOR UES BEG RSE SAK BOR GS BR HRS KOR SS aS EG 10-34
10-1
reed Cal TAVGUES 6 505 hie 66d bowen S +b Yee mes arenes wews 10-35
ENGNG ing (ell LAVOUN® is ver cie-how une one een eeeanenanawew eens 10-35
Viewing YOuUr WOrkSN@St a g:siwisw eases ew saw ney sun cee ea GOR ako aR 10-36
Setting and Removing a Fixed Titles Area.................... 10-36
Working With a Split Worksheet.............. ccc cece ec eceees 10-38
Splitting the Worksheet Into Two Windows ................ 10-39
Moving the Cursor to the Other Window ................... 10-40
Synchronizing the Two Windows..............cccceececees 10-40
Restoring the Worksheet to One Window .................. 10-41
Blanking Areas of the Worksheet............cccccccececesceces 10-41
Deeting Rows Or GOlminiii® scsuw caw wan tes sacs eaneweesGatiacseas 10-42
ISSring ROWS Of GOLUMING sosws won cov ie xeak ce caw 68S Eadie er 10-43
Moving Columns or Rows Within a Worksheet ................. 10-43
CCORVING TATORTIAUON, osesxcee 6%. 2OS GES hme HOW SU KES EulHe Goe wen 0 10-44
What Are the Copy-From Cells?........ ccc cece cee een e ees 10-45
What'Are the Gopy+T0 Celle? «cs sce ces t209 ine gan couewen e993 10-45
Gooey the Contents EXQGh? cise cowexetenyasxaenwewancanas 10-49
Copy the Contents Depending on Their New Position? ..... 10-50
Sens 10r COBVING s6.pcanacaaswe WA FA Sed bean SHEE SE KE a’ 10-50
CBICUIAtING THEW VAIUIES o.cax nnn S58 Ke@iisina vanced Os ORS BO ere wes 10-51
Arranging Information in the Worksheet ............... cee ee eee 10-52
Finding a Cell or Specific Information ..........cccce cee ceneees 10-53
Changing ne Nameore. Files iis cesvenyesseex tee eee can now wees 10-54
10-2
a
.
tf
o
of
Ne
wi! =|
ce
re)
re
ee ote
°-
Working with information in worksheets involves creating the information
using special Spreadsheet techniques that make it easy, looking at the
worksheet and displaying numbers in different ways, and rearranging
information when necessary. These activities are discussed in this chapter.
Making a Worksheet
This section discusses the general concepts involved in planning a work-
sheet and tells how to make a worksheet from scratch, from a VisiCalc file,
and from a DIF file.
Planning a New Worksheet
When you plan a worksheet, you decide
— what answers you want,
— what values you need to produce these answers,
— what formulas will produce the answers, and
— how you want the worksheet to look.
These questions are discussed in general here. See specific sections for
detailed information. To help you plan your own worksheets, several sample
files have been included in the sample files disk. As planning is explained
here, references will be made to these sample files. If you want, you can
display each of these files.
“By the Way:”
Spreadsheet files other than the ones mentioned here are on the
sample files disk. Take a look at all the Spreadsheet files on the disk.
You may want to use them as a basis for your own worksheets.
The first file, which contains net personal worth information, is illustrated in
Figure 10-1. The worksheet is in a file called “Personal Worth” on the ///E-Z
Pieces sample files disk.
10-3
Figure 10-2 shows the Winter Grades worksheet. The worksheet is in a file
4 te ; ” * * .
‘3 called “Winter Grades” on the ///E-Z Pieces sample files disk.
Personal Financial Net Worth Statement 1/1784
LIABILITIES
-4a
ae |
Fluid Assets: Bille Due:
Cash on Hand VISA Winter Grades
Checking Accounts Sears = ;
2Core core core
Savings Account Medical Bills : Students Test | Test 2 Test 3 Average
Dental Bills ‘
vs , Avenir, beorge %& #5 GB 947,
homecwner’s Ins. Balder, Marsha 86 $7 9Z 5 88%,
Auta Ins, Cleveland, Mark 77 B2 BO ha
Eqwatds, Bret 83 80 65 Sy
Long Term Assets: Life Ins, , ‘ Hegley, Elaine BS Be 87 : 6%
Certif. Deposit 4 Jenred, Jack 7 e0 ” 0
; Lotter, Laura oF oe 9? : oh,
U.S. Savings Bonds 1000 Matthrews, Orem 9 90 89 2 91%,
Life Insurance 175000 Normans, Cuz &4 70 74 7
E : = Prince, Perry ev 6h 6 73 6%,
Taxes We Owe: P 1 Serenski, Bob &I £3 80) 8%.
181000 © J Winthrop, Nige! of 95 oY vy
Market Value of Securities:
Stocks
Options
Real Estate Tax
Sel¢# Empi. Tax
Loans We (we:
Mortgage on Home
=e]
—_—
Clate Average 85 &4 85 é BS.
Figure 10-2.
=
Market Value of Real Property: Mortgage on Duplex 65000 ! ’
Sie Aute boars 8000 rs Winter Grades Worksheet
Duplex Furniture Loan 4400
Home Impry. Loan sige = , ;
245000 { The Loan Schedule worksheet is illustrated in Figure 10-3. The worksheet is
| 175400 ’ in the file called “Loan Schedule” on the ///E-Z Pieces sample files disk.
Marke et whe oe ¥ contin — You can play “What If?” by changing the loan amount, payments per year,
Automobiles 13000 i total number of years, and nominal interest rate.
Clothing 4500 ‘
Jewelry, Tableware 1250
Computer Equipment :
Stamp Collection i
¥
Tax retund due
Loan to Bil)
TOTAL CURRENT ASSET VALLE
))>>23> NET WORTH AS OF THIS DATE
TOTAL CURRENT LIAB. VALUE 180375
288385
Figure 10-1.
Net Personal Worth Worksheet
10-4
ca
on)
ry)
1=406—C la té«éidL:«CKL
re r=3 r=
- -—
ww wu www Oe
Loan Amt
Pty ¥e
Total mrs
LOAN AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE
—————— =
Interes! Lb P5:%
de
Decimal
Interest 12,40 % (APR)
Payments 759.08
Loan Fmortizat:on
Fayment No, Principal Payment Interest
75200,.00 739.06 738.33
7 ‘57.08 73e.1)
797.98 735.89
739.08 735.66
799.58
734.08
759.08
759.08
“Oo, G8
797.05
797.06
759.08
Figure 10-3.
Loan Schedule Worksheet
10-5
What Answers Do You Want?
The first step in planning a worksheet, and certainly the most important, is to
decide what answers you want your worksheet to produce. Knowing the
answers you want will make all the steps along the way a lot easier.
If you're doing a personal budget worksheet, you’ll want totals for the year
and your cash position after you subtract expenses from income. If you're
keeping track of your students’ grades, you'll want each student’s average
and the class average. If you're figuring your net personal worth, you'll want
assets minus liabilities.
What Values Produce the Answers?
As you decide what answers you want your worksheet to produce, you also
define the values you need that produce the answers.
The answers you want: fhe values that produce them:
ltemization of all your assets and
liabilities.
Your net worth
Grades for your students and
class averages All test grades for all students
Principal, interest rate, and
number of months for the loan
The monthly payment on a loan
“Terminology Trivia:”
In traditional data processing terms, the answers you want to
produce are called the “output”. And the values you need to produce
the answers are called the “input”. Depending on who you want to
impress, you may want to remember this.
What Formulas Make the Values Produce the Answers?
After you decide on the answers you want and the values that produce those
answers, you will want to define the formulas that produce the answers. For
example,
Net assets—net liabilities = net personal worth
The total for all tests/the number of tests = the average
for the tests
10-6
7 '
mt
an!
Th
tal
ai
os
il
l
2
ae
au!
al
: ry
—_—
iad
| —— <>
=!
mor om om
we
aed
What Should Your Worksheet Look Like?
At this point, you can probably visualize the layout of your worksheet. For
example, the net worth worksheet makes the best sense with assets and
liabilities listed in two columns. Assets and liabilities are broken down into
logical groups, and these groups are in turn itemized and subtotalled. Total
asset and liability figures follow the itemization, and then comes the bottom
line, the net worth figure.
On the other hand, the students’ grades worksheet works best as a typical
rows and columns grid. Each kind of grade is listed across the top and
students’ names are listed down on the left. The grades for each student are
averaged across, and the class average is taken for each test at the bottom of
the worksheet.
The last sample worksheet, the loan schedule, allows you to provide several
values at the top of the worksheet. After you supply the values, ///E-zZ
Pieces calculates all the principal, payment, and interest figures in one long
column.
Visualizing your worksheet helps you decide the best way to place “labels”,
or titles, and numbers on the worksheet. Of course, there are as many ways
to do aworksheet as there are / / / E-Z Pieces users, so you Can do it the way
that works best for you.
Now think about how you want the worksheet to look. That’s determined by
worksheet “standard values”. Standard values determine how information is
displayed.
First of all, labels have standard values. The worksheet standard values for
labels determine whether a title such as “Assets” is left justified, right
justified, or centered. ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess is that you'll want your
labels left justified.
“Values”, or numbers, have standard values, too. For example, the same
value, 1234.56, can be displayed in different ways: 1,234.56 (“commas for-
mat”), $1,234.56 (“dollars format"), and 1234 (“fixed decimal” with 0 decimal
places), among others. ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess for values is called
“Appropriate.” “Appropriate,” in general, means “displayed as you type it.”
///€E-Z Pieces does its best to display a value as you type it, depending on
the column width you provide.
Along with setting standards for values and labels, you set the widths of
columns, too. You can use ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess, which is that all
columns are nine characters wide. You can change the width of all columns
or only specific ones, if you want.
10-7
Calculation of values has a standard value, too, both in when it’s done and in
what order. You should think about whether you want ///E-Z Pieces to
calculate all your values automatically every time you change a value or if
you want to give the signal for calculation. / / / E-Z Pieces’ best guess is that
you'll want automatic calculation. If you want to give the signal, however,
you change the frequency of calculation to “manual.”
You also should decide in what order calculation should occur. ///E-Z
Pieces’ best guess is down columns and across rows. You can change that
to across rows and down columns, or to the order /// E-Z Pieces thinks is
appropriate. The Loan Schedule worksheet, for example, calculates across
rows and then down columns because the calculation in one cell depends
on that in the cell above and to the right.
The sample worksheets will give you an idea about formatting:
The standard value for values in the Personal Worth worksheet is commas
format. This means two decimal places, commas between thousands, and
no dollar signs. You could also choose to format these values in fixed
decimal format with no decimal places. The totals at the bottom are format-
ted differently, in dollars format, with dollar signs.
The standard value for values in the Winter Grades worksheet is fixed
decimal format with no decimal places. The percentages down the right and
across the bottom, however, are in percent format, with a percent sign
following.
The standard value for values in the Loan Schedule worksheet is fixed
decimal format with two decimal places. One value is formatted differently,
the “PMT/YR’” value. It is formatted in fixed decimal format with no decimal
places.
To summarize, planning your worksheet involves
— Planning the input values and the formulas you need to produce the
answers,
— Planning the general layout of the worksheet, and
Determining how values and labels should be displayed as well as
the width of columns and how calculation should happen.
Creating the Worksheet
Follow these steps to create a new worksheet:
1. Choose “Add files to the Desktop” from the Main Menu.
10-8
= FF we we we we
ee ee ED eee eee ES
Pe
i
2. Choose “Make anew file forthe Spreadsheet” from the “ADD FILES”
menu.
3. Choose “From scratch”, “From a DIF file”, or “From a VisiCalc™ file”
from the “SPREADSHEET” menu.
From Scratch
Follow these steps to create your worksheet from scratch:
1. Type the name of the new file. Filenames can be up to 15 characters
long. The first character must be a letter, and they can contain
upper- or lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and spaces. Then
press “RETURN”.
///€E-Z Pieces displays a worksheet such as the one illustrated in Figure
10-4. The callouts refer to the numbered items in the text that follows.
Figure 10-4.
A New Worksheet
1. The name of your new file
2. Therows and columns, or “coordinates”, that divide your worksheet
into “cells”. A cell is the intersection of a row and a column.
3. Your place within the worksheet. What you type now will go into this
cell.
10-9
4. The “cell indicator” tells which cell the cursor is on and what's in it
5. The Spreadsheet’s prompt
6. The cursor that requests information in response to the prompt
Now you can start typing information into your new worksheet. You can
— Set the standards for the values and labels in the worksheet, for the
order and frequency of recalculation, and for the column width.
— Type the titles and the values.
NOTES:
See “Using Worksheet Standard Values.”
See “Typing and Editing Information.”
From a DIF File
You can use a DIF file—a file created by // / E-Z Pieces’ Data Base, VisiCalc,
and other programs—as the source of a Spreadsheet file. When you first
create the DIF file, however, use the “C”, or “column-wise” option. Then
information is in the right order.
Follow these steps to make a Spreadsheet file from a DIF file:
1. If you chose “From a DIF file”, ///E-Z Pieces asks for the file's
“pathname”. Type the complete pathname and press “RETURN”.
2. Typethe///E-Z Pieces name for the file. Filenames can be up to 15
characters long. They must begin with a letter, and they can contain
upper—or lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and spaces. Then
press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed briefly in Chapter 1 of
this manual and in the Apple /// Owner’s Manual.
From a VisiCalc File
You can use a VisiCalc file as the source of a Spreadsheet file.
Follow these steps to make a Spreadsheet file from a VisiCalc file:
1. If you chose “From a VisiCalc file”, / / / E-Z Pieces asks for the file's
“pathname”. Type the complete pathname and press “RETURN”.
10-10
tl
Ty ss SS
i
] “
hel
oa
6
r=
ii
‘1%
onl
inj
ie
lms
FE
2. Type the///E-Z Pieces name for the file. Filenames can be up to 15
characters long. They must begin with a letter, and they can contain
upper- or lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and spaces. Then
press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed briefly in Chapter 1 of
this manual and in the Apple /// Owner's Manual.
Working with Worksheet Standard Values
Worksheet “standard values” specify how information in the worksheet is
displayed. Worksheet standard values tell, for example, whether labels are
left justified, right justified, or centered in cells. They also tell how many
decimal places values should have, or whether they should have dollar or
percent signs.
Before you start a worksheet or at any time while you are working with it, you
can change the best guess standard values. You change worksheet stand-
ard values with the “OPEN-APPLE”-“V” (standard Values) command, dis-
cussed later in this section. After you change the standard values, the
information you have already typed is displayed according to your specifi-
cations. And new information is displayed as you type it according to the
same specifications.
Worksheet standard values are available for “value formats”, “label formats”,
“column widths”, “protection”, and “recalculate”.
You can override worksheet standard values for specific cells with the
“OPEN-APPLE”-"L” command.
NOTE:
See “Working With Cell Layouts” for information
on how to override standard values.
Figure 10-5 shows the worksheet standard values in the Winter Grades
worksheet. The numbers refer to the explanations that follow.
10-11
1
Students
Avenir, George
Balder, Marsha SE 7 v2 BS
77 os 7
Scare Score Ecare Score
Test 1 Test @ Test 3 Test 4 Average
Cleveland, Mark ; os 67
Edgwards, Bret 3 85 54
Hegley, Elarne 3 8 ? BB
Jenred, Jack 77 7 Ba
Lotter, Laura f #8 5
Matthrews, (rem : W2
Normans, Cuz , 7 ? 80
Prince, Perry a7 U bo 75
Serensk:, Bob g 83 BS
Winthrop, Nigel 5 y SE
Class Average
Figure 10-5.
Worksheet Standard Values
1. Titles are left justified.
2. Numbers are fixed decimal format with no decimal places.
3. Columns are nine characters wide.
4. The values in percentage format are exceptions to the worksheet
standard values.
The two other worksheet standard values—Recalculation Order and Fre-
quency, and Protection—are not evident by looking at a worksheet, but
rather when you use the worksheet or by scrolling to the end of the “Help”
listing for the Spreadsheet.
NOTE:
See “Protection” and “Recalculate.”
After you provide a standard for labels, such as, right justified, and for
values, such as, fixed decimal with two decimal places, then all values take
the format of the labels standard.
Remember, however, that the standard values have nothing to do with what
is stored in the cell, but everything to do with what is displayed. For example,
10-12
‘ai OL
if you type And the Standardis ///E-Z Pieces And stores
displays
1.2345 Fixed decimal, no 1 1.2345
decimal places
1 Fixed decimal, three 1.000 1
decimal places
Details About Worksheet Standard Values
Worksheet standard values are discussed in detail in this section. Instruc-
tions for changing them are in the next section.
10-13
Value Formats
Five value formats are available as worksheet standard values—Fixed, Dol-
lars, Commas, Percent, and Appropriate. Table 10-1 describes them.
Format Description Example
Fixed Contains a fixed number of decimal 163
places, 0-7 -137.00
Commas Provides commas between thousands. 113.58
Negative amounts are in parentheses. 1,345.09
Contains a fixed number of decimal (4.66)
places, 0-7.
Dollars Same as commas except with a dollar $113.58
sign before each amount. $1,345.09
($4.66)
$1.6
Percent A percentage with a specified number 1235.7%
of decimal places (0-7). -4.25%
Appropriate § Appropriate means that ///E-Z Pieces
Appropriate is / / / E-Z Pieces’ best guess for worksheet standard values for
values.
does its best to display numbers
exactly as you type them. Numbers are
right justified in the column with a
blank in the leftmost position of all
columns. Trailing zeros after the
decimal place are dropped.
Table 10-1.
Standard Values for Values
lf a number does not fit in the width you have set up for the column, it is
stored the way you type it but pound signs (#’s) are displayed. Thus, a cell
looks like this: “######’. Widen the column if necessary.
10-14
mma ae elo
ri
ia) il
Label Formats
Three label formats are available as worksheet standard values—Left Justi-
fied, Right Justified, and Centered. Table 10-2 describes them.
Format Description Example
Left Justified Labels are left justified in cells. -Jan -
Right Justified Labels are right justified in cells. - Jan-
Centered Labels are centered in cells. - Jan -
Table 10-2.
Standard Values for Labels
Left justified is /// E-Z Pieces’ best guess for the standard value for labels.
Column widths
Nine-character-wide columns are the worksheet standard for all new work-
sheets. You can change the worksheet standard to columns from 2 to 75
characters wide.
Protection
You can protect cells so that the entries can't be changed inadvertently by
you or someone else using your worksheet. Then the cell contents can be
changed only if /// E-Z Pieces recalculates it.
Protection is accomplished with the combination of the “OPEN-APPLE”-
“V" command and the “OPEN-APPLE”-“L” command. The “OPEN-APPLE’-
“V" command enforces or removes protection specified by the “OPEN-
APPLE”-“L" command. /// E-Z Pieces’ best guess is protection, so any cells
you protect with the “OPEN-APPLE”-"L” command are automatically pro-
tected unless you change the standard value to no protection.
You can temporarily remove protection to make changes and then enforce it
again by using “OPEN-APPLE”-“V”.
10-15
Recalculation
When you type a new value into your worksheet, ///E-Z Pieces recalcu-
lates all the other values to take the new value into account. Recalculate,
however, has two different settings that affect it—the Order setting and the
Frequency setting. Table 10-3 describes both.
The Order Setting includes: Which Means:
Values calculated according to
formulas in cells across rows and
down columns
Calculation by rows
Values calculated according to
formulas in cells from the top of a
column to the bottom and then
across rows
Calculation by columns
The Frequency Setting includes: Which means:
Automatic ///€-Z Pieces automatically
recalculates new values whenever
you change a value.
Manual ///E-Z Pieces recalculates new
values whenever you use the
“OPEN-APPLE”-“K” (for Calcula-
tion) command.
Table 10-3.
Recalculation Order and Frequency
Columns is the best guess for order of recalculation. If the formulas in your
worksheet work across rows, change to Rows.
Automatic is the best guess for frequency of recalculation. However, if you
are typing a lot of values and formulas, you may want to keep typing and
calculate all at once. Then change to manual recalculation.
Checking Standard Values in Effect
Worksheet standard values in effect for your worksheet are available on the
help screen. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"?” to see them.
10-16
ee ES = LE Cs es Oo Oe le ee
th
=.
°
Changing Worksheet Standard Values
Here’s how to change worksheet standard values:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“V”,
2. Choose “Value format”, “Label format”, “Column width”, “Protec-
tion”, or “Recalculate”, depending on whether you want to change
the worksheet standard values for values, labels, column width,
protection, or recalculation.
3. If you choose: Respond as follows:
Choose “Fixed”, “Dollars”,
“Commas”, “Percent”, or
“Appropriate”.
“Value format”
Then, for all but “Appropriate”,
type the number of decimal pla-
ces and press “RETURN”.
Choose “Left justify”, “Right jus-
tify”, or “Center”.
Use “OPEN-APPLE”-“RIGHT-
ARROW" or “LEFT-ARROW” to
change the column widths. Press
“ESCAPE” when you’re through.
“Label format”
“Column widths”
Choose “No” or “Yes”. “Yes”
enforces protection, and “No”
removes protection.
“Protection”
“Recalculation” Choose “Order” or “Frequency”
For “Order”, choose “Approp-
riate’, “Rows”, or “Columns”
For “Frequency”, choose “Auto-
matic” or “Manual”
10-17
Typing and Editing Information
This section tells how to type and edit information.
Typing Entries
It’s easy to type information into Spreadsheet entries. Several guidelines
apply:
1. Use the “overstrike cursor’, which is the blinking square cursor, or
the “insert cursor’, which is the blinking bar cursor, whichever is
easier for you, when you type new entries. Whatever you type with
the overstrike cursor replaces the information under the cursor.
Whatever you type with the insert cursor goes to the left of the
character the cursor is on. Information to the right of the cursor
4, Press “ESCAPE” to restore the former entry and back the cursor up
to the first character of the entry.
5. Use “LEFT-ARROW’” and “RIGHT-ARROW’” to move the cursor past
characters, without changing them.
6. Press CONTROL-“Y” to erase the rest of an entry starting from
where the cursor is.
7. Press “RETURN” after you finish editing the entry.
After you press “RETURN” /// E-Z Pieces checks your formula to see if it’s
legal. It checks, for example, to see whether all the entries in a range are in
the same row or column, and whether you used parentheses properly if you
are nesting formulas. If there’s a problem, /// E-Z Pieces beeps at you and
waits for you to correct the mistake.
moves to the right. Switch back and forth between the two cursors
with “OPEN-APPLE”-"E”.
Using Labels
2. Each time you press DELETE, one character to the left of the cursor
is deleted. “Labels” are entries with no numeric value. They usually identify numeric
information and are used mostly for column and row headings.
me eo Oa ea essai
3. Press “RETURN” at the end of each entry. Or press the arrow keys to
confirm the entry and move the cursor in the direction of the arrow. = All entries that start with letters are labels. Labels can also start with
- numbers or special characters, even spaces. For example, suppose you are
numbering your column headings from 1 through 10 across the top of the
WARNING =a worksheet. Because these numbers look like values to // / E-Z Pieces, you
It’s important to remember that pressing “RIGHT- : = have to identify these numbers as labels.
ARROW”, “LEFT-ARROW”, “DOWN-ARROW”,
or “UP-ARROW” confirms your entry and moves
the cursor to another entry. In the Data Base,
however, pressing “RIGHT-ARROW", or “LEFT-
ARROW” moves the cursor within an entry.
To identify as labels entries that don’t start with letters, first type “quote”.
That's the signal to /// E-Z Pieces that you are starting a label. The “quote”
does not become part of the label; it’s just understood by/// E-Z Piecesasa
label-signal.
ia
If a label is too long to fit in one cell, // / E-Z Pieces automatically divides it
among adjacent non-numeric, unprotected cells.
Editing Entries
To edit information in a cell, use the “OPEN-APPLE”-“U” (Use edit feature)
command. To do so: ///E-Z Pieces Tips
”
======== , simply hold down the key until the
cell is full. The cell indicator will say “(Label)
Repeated--” or “(Label) Repeated-=". When you
widen a column, ///E-Z Pieces adds more
characters.
1. Put the cursor on the cell you want to edit.
rm
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“U”. ///E-Z Pieces displays the contents of
the cell on the entry line, just under the cell indicator. That's where
you edit.
3. Use either cursor when you are editing.
ial
"
as
10-18 ” 10-19
The cell indicator provides information about labels, as Table 10-4 illus-
trates. It tells that the entry is a label rather than a value and provides
information about special cell layouts.
Type this And the cell
To get this label information indicator shows
[Jan 1 84 | Jan 1 84 |(Label) Jan 1 84 |
| Date: | 4 Date: |(Label) Date: |
1 , =] |(Label) 1 |
pe , 4 ——— |(Label) ——— |
| Feb | Feb | (Label, Layout-R) Feb |
Table 10-4.
How Labels Go In Cells
Using Values
Values include numbers, pointers, functions, and formulas. This section
provides details about each kind.
Numbers
Numbers are the first kind of value. Numbers are entries that are used in
calculations. They designate a quantity of units such as dollars and donuts.
Spreadsheet numbers must start with the digits 0 through 9, aplus sign(+), a
minus sign (-), or a decimal point (.).
The cell indicator provides information about numbers, as Table 10-5
shows. The cell indicator tells that the number Is a value, rather than a label,
and provides information about special cell layouts.
10-20
ee ee ee ee Oe Oe ee
mm Oasis OC eelCOCUlereelCrelClreeelUretlUrtmlCUr
in} lid
wh
mth th th
mm 2m tO
. .
-— —~
iaJ
lind
a
For the value Where the cell indicator The cell
in the cell displays the number layout is
"4250.00" “(Value) 1250” The worksheet
standard, fixed
with 2 decimal
places
“$436.00” “(Value, Layout-D2) 136” Cell format,
dollars with 2
decimal places
“-4478.3" “(Value, Layout-F1) -4478.32” Cell format,
fixed with 1
decimal place
Table 10-5.
How Numbers Go In Cells
Pointers
Pointers are the second type of /// E-Z Pieces value. Pointers specify, or
point to, other cells in the worksheet. They tell ///E-Z Pieces to put the
value in the pointed-to cell into the current cell. /// E-Z Pieces takes the
value exactly from the pointed-to cell, so that the current cell contains the
same value as the point-to cell.
Pointers must begin with a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (-), which is how
///E-Z Pieces knows you're not typing a label. Following the plus sign are
the coordinates for the cell you’re pointing to. Examples of pointers are
“+A5” and “-Z280”.
The cell indicator provides information about pointers, as Table 10-6 shows.
lt tells that the pointer is a value, rather than a label, and displays the pointer.
10-21
For the value Where the cell indicator The cell
in the cell displays the number layout is
“1250.00” “(Value) +B6” Worksheet
standard, fixed
with 2 decimal
places
“$136.00” “(Value, Layout-D2) +J30” Cell format,
dollars with 2
decimal places
“_AATB.3” “(Value, Layout-F1) C47” Cell format,
fixed with 1
decimal place
Table 10-6.
How Pointers Go In Cells
Functions
“Functions” are the third type of value. They are codes that stand for a
common or complex calculation. When you type a function into a cell, you
are calling for a special formula that operates on cells you specify or values
you supply. All functions start with the “@” sign (the “at” sign) and an
abbreviation that stands for the function, such as @SUM or @SQRT.
Suppose you type this function into cell C44:
@SUM (V13...V16)
@SUM is the code that stands for “Add up the values in the
following cells:”
(V13...V16) stands for “Cells V13, V14, V15, and V16.”
After the sum of cells V13 through V16 is calculated, it goes in cell C44. The
@SUM function, just like all other functions, lets you say a lot in a little.
Here are several other examples of functions. Suppose each one is typed
into cell A2:
“@SQRT(B44)” means “Figure out the square root of the value
in cell B44 and put it into cell A2.
“@MAX(C33, 125, A4*65)” means “Find the largest value trom
the contents of cell C33, the number 125, and the result of
10-22
m wm wh th
im wm wt
i
we
|=
multiplying cell A4 times 65. Then put that value into cell A2.”
“@INT(M19)” means “Put the integer part of the contents of
cell M19 into cell A2.”
Functions always consist of the following:
@
The code that stands for the function
(argument)
Table 10-7 shows the possible types of arguments for functions.
Argument What It Means
Value A single value, either a cell reference a
number, or an expression that evaluates to a
number, such as (A19)
Range A series of adjacent cells, such as (A36...A39)
or (A48...D48)
List A list of single values or ranges separated by
commas, such as (D45, X19, 135) or (A36...A39,
A48...D48)
Table 10-7.
Arguments for Functions
Table 10-8 lists the kinds of functions ///E-Z Pieces provides. They’re all
described in the remainder of this section.
Kind of
Function Possibilities
Arithmetic @ABS, @AVG, @CHOOSE, @COUNT,
@ERROR, @INT, @LOOKUP, @MAX, @MIN,
@SQRT, @SUM
Financial @IRR, @NPV
Logical @IF
Table 10-8.
Kinds of Functions
10-23
Arithmetic Functions
Some arithmetic functions perform calculations on a value, some on a list,
some with no argument, and some by selecting alternatives. Each type is
described separately.
On a Value
The functions in Table 10-9 perform calculations on a single value:
Function Result
@ABS (value) Absolute value of the argument
@INT (value) Integer portion of the argument
@SQRT (value) Square root of the argumem
Table 10-9.
Arithmetic Functions With a Single-Value Argument
On a List
The functions in Table 10-10 perform calculations on a list of values.
Function Result
@AVG (list) Arithmetic mean of the values in the list. The
result is equivalent to @SUM (list) divided by
@COUNT (list). The maximum number of ele-
ments in the list is 255.
@COUNT (list) Number of non-blank entries in the list. The
maximum number of elements in the list is 255.
@MAX (list) The largest value in the list
@MIN (list) The smallest value in the list
@SUM (list) The sum of all values in the list
Table 10-10.
Arithmetic Functions With a List Argument
10-24
mim wh ib
i
iil
rw
om dl
ren
of
a
a
ca)
re
eet
rE)
rr
5
re
rT
na
Ta
i
Without Arguments
@NA and @ERROR perform calculations without arguments.
Type @NA in cells where you know you need a value but it’s not available
yet. When ///E-Z Pieces calculates values that refer to cells that contain
@NA, the result is “NA”. That helps you keep track of values you need to
type in yet.
@ERROR causes “ERROR” to be displayed at the location where it is
entered and all locations that refer to it.
By Selecting Alternatives
@CHOOSE and @LOOKUP can be used to select alternatives for
calculations.
-
@CHOOSE takes one of the values in its list of arguments using the first
element of the list as the index to the following arguments. For example,
suppose cell Al contains @CHOOSE (B5,18,47,39). Cell B5 is evaluated to
see if its value is 1,2, or 3. If its value is 1, then 18 is putin cell A1. If its value is
2, then 47, and if 3, then 39.
lf the first argument is 0 or less or if its value is greater than the number of
remaining arguments, then @CHOOSE is evaluated to “NA”.
@LOOKUP sets up two tables, the first either arow or acolumn you specify,
and the second the column to the right or the row below the first. It then
takes a value you supply, the search value, and looks for the largest value in
the first table that is equal to or less than the search value. When it finds the
correct value, it returns the value in the corresponding cell in the second
table.
The values in the first table must be in ascending order.
If the search value is smaller than the first entry in the first table, “NA” is
returned. If the search value is larger than any value in the first table, the last
value in the table is returned.
Figure 10-6 shows an example of a @LOOKUP function.
First table
Second table
Search value
The value of @LOOKUP(C12,A4...E4) is 70.
10-25
oF ile: Lookup RE] El Aa0O, CHANGE Escape: Main Menu
merresss=A=sssess=Pessaeeee(sserese2 fpesanase|s —e=sSs===F Ss cneeess =ssseesShee==
Vaiue of @LOOKUP (C12,A4...E4) Is 70
ot a POINTERS
30
First Table
a
Figure 10-6.
Lookup Table
Financial Functions
The functions in Table 10-11 perform specialized financial functions.
Function Result
@I|IRR(amount of investment, range) Internal Rate of Return
based on an initial
investment and a range of
even or uneven cash
flows. You must supply
both arguments.
@NPV (interest rate, range) Net Present Value of a
series of even or uneven
payments (the range
argument)
Table 10-11.
Financial Functions
10-26
rn
aaa a er eer area ee ee ea
@IRR returns an interest rate at which a discounted series of payments
equals an initial investment. The amount of investment is either a cell or a
value. The range is the range of cells that contain payments.
Different formulas are used to calculate the internal rate of return, which
means ///E-Z Pieces may return a different answer than that returned by a
financial calculator.
@NPV calculates the Net Present Value of future cash flows. the first
argument is the discount rate, or cost of money used to discount the future
cash flows, and the second is a range of locations that incliide the cash flows
themselves.
Logical Function: @IF
Here are several samples of @IF:
@IF(B1>Bz2, 13, X19)
@IF(C11<5, 14,J20/J19)
@IF(A1>=3, 11, B4-5)
@IF takes three values. The first must be a logical value, that is, an expres-
sion that can be evaluated to true or false. The second and third can be any
value.
@IF uses logical operators to evaluate the expression to be either true or
false. Depending on whether it’s true or false, the value of the second or the
third argument is returned.
Table 10-12 lists the logical operators you can use in the expression and
their values.
Operator Value
mad TRUE if the first value in the expression is less
than the second. FALSE If it’s not.
> TRUE is first value is greater than second
value. FALSE if it’s not.
= TRUE if first value equals second value. FALSE
if it doesn't.
Table 10-12.
Logical Operators
10-27
Table 10-13 shows how the values of the logical expression are evaluated.
Value of First Argument Evaluates to
TRUE Value of second argument
FALSE Value of third argument
NA NA
Not logical or ERROR ERROR
Table 10-13.
Evaluations for @IF
Formulas
Formulas are the fourth type of value. Formulas are mathematical state-
ments that calculate numbers. They are stored in worksheet cells, and then
during recalculation (automatic or manual), the value of the formula is
calculated. The worksheet may be “zoomed in” to display formulas by
pressing “OPEN-APPLE”-"2”.
Formulas can consist of two or more of the following:
— Numbers
— Arithmetic operators (+ -*/ >)
— Pointers (+A6 or +B17)
— Functions
Figure 10-7 shows how a formula works.
10-28
"ene ee OeOeeeeeeso
"i
Oe
mw Wm wih wm
lami
REVIEW 80D CHANGE
Owexw=s=essaE
Geee=====( eeeseses
Escape: Main Menu
=+=aza
== Fesseeees Geeeeses
S113 39
POINTERS: f
Cell 84 contains the 105.464
value 4113 :
Celi C4 contains the
value 39
Cell F9 contains the After recalculation still contains the formula
c displays
B4/C4, but the value 105.46
Figure 10-7.
How a Formula Works
Formulas must begin with a plus sign (+), a minus sign (-), a decimal, the
digits 0-9, a left parentheses “(”, or the “at” sign (@). The cell indicator
provides information about formulas, as Table 10-14 shows. The cell indica-
tor tells that the formula is a value and displays the formula.
For the value Where the cell indicator The cell
in the cell displays the formula layout is
“4250.00” “(Value) +B6*C4” Worksheet stand-
ard, fixed with 2
decimal places
“$136.00” “(Value, Layout-D2) +J30-300” Cell format, dol-
lars with 2
decimal places
“-4478.3” “(Value, Layout-F1) (A5-B7)” Cell format, fixed
with 1 decimal
place
Table 10-14.
How Formulas Go In Cells
10-29
Moving the Cursor Within A Worksheet
You can move the cursor cell by cell through a worksheet or more quickly,
through larger units of information. You can also move the cursor to a
specific cell. Here’s how to move the cursor:
Move the cursor from cell to cell
across rows or up and down
columns
Move the cursor from cell to cell
to the right and to the left
Move the cursor to the cell on the
right or the left of the screen, and
then in the same direction across
one full screen of information
Move the cursor to the cell on the
top or the bottom of the screen,
and then in the same direction up
or down one full screen of
information
Use /// E-Z Pieces Ruler to jump
the cursor proportionally through
sections of the worksheet
Move the cursor to a specific cell
“RIGHT-ARROW”, “LEFT-
ARROW”, “UP-ARROW”,
“DOWN-ARROW”
Holding the arrow key down
moves the worksheet, so you can
see other parts of it.
“TAB” and “OPEN-APPLE”-
“TAB”
“OPEN-APPLE”-"RIGHT-
ARROW” or “LEFT-ARROW”
“OPEN-APPLE”-“UP-ARROW” or
“DOWN-ARROW"
“OPEN-APPLE”-"1” through
“OPEN-APPLE"-“9”
“OPEN-APPLE”-"F”
Choose “Coordinates” (You can
type "Gs 6)
Type the coordinates that mark
the cell you want and press
“RETURN”.
10-30
a es ee eee ee EE ee ee
rt
ia
i
imi
Jump the cursor to the other half
of the split screen “OPEN-APPLE”-"J” after you
have split the screen by using
OPEN-APPLE AND “W”".
NOTE:
see “Using /// E-Z Pieces’ Ruler” in Chapter 2
for information about how the Ruler works.
Working with Cell Layouts
When you work with worksheet standard values, you specify how all cells in
the worksheet should be displayed. But you can override these standard
values for only some Cells in the worksheet—the cells in the row or those in
two columns, for example. These overriding specifications are called the
“cell layout”. You specify cell layout with the “OPEN-APPLE”-"L” command
(for Layout), discussed in this section.
Cell layout specifications are for the “value formats”, “label formats”
“column widths,” and “protection”.
NOTE:
See “Working with Worksheet Standard Values”
for more information about standard values.
Cell layouts are illustrated in the Winter Grades worksheet in Figure 10-8.
The numbers refer to the numbers in the text.
Winter Grades
Score Score
Students 2 Test 3 Test 4 Average
Avenir, George 5 o4
Balder, Marsha 7 Z 85
Cleveland, Mark 6?
Eqwards, Bret 3 5 84
Hegley, Elaine Ss } 37 BB
Jenred, Jack 7 ?? B4
Lotter, Laura 55
Matthrews, Orem 5 0 v2
Normans, Cuz é 7 7 &0
Prince, Perry ? to
Sereaski, Bob é g el 88
Winthrop, Nigel 96
Clase Average
Figure 10-8.
Cell Layouts
10-31
1. Standard values specify that columns are nine characters wide,
labels are left justified, and values are fixed decimal format with no
decimal places.
2. These values are in percentage layout. Their cell formats take prece-
dence over the standard value for values.
3. These values are in fixed decimal format with two decimal places.
Their cell formats take precedence over the standard value for
values.
The cell layouts you provide fora group of cells affects only those cells with
that specific kind of information in them already. For example, after you
provide cell layout specifications for values in a group of cells, the values
already in the group are redisplayed according to your specifications. But
blank cells and cells with labels do not get the specification unless you
specify them with the “OPEN-APPLE”-"L” Protection Entry or Block option.
So some new values you type are not displayed according to the specifica-
tion, but according to the worksheet standard value instead.
This same principal applies when you supply a cell layout specification for
labels in a group of cells. The specification applies only to cells with labels
already in them and to blank cells if you use the “OPEN-APPLE’-"L” Protec-
tion Entry or Block option.
The cell indicator displays the cell layout if it is different from the worksheet
standard values. For example, if the worksheet standard is for labels to be
left justified, and you specify that a cell be right justified, the cell indicator
displays “Label, Layout-R”.
Details About Cell Layouts
Cell layouts are discussed in detail in this section. Instructions for changing
them are in the next section.
Value Formats
Six value formats are available as worksheet standard values—Fixed, Dol-
lars, Commas, Percent, Appropriate, and Standard. Table 10-15 describes
them.
10-32
CE G Ga © Gee — i
mom m om
m mh oh eh
mom om eh
_
i, aaa
im!
imi
Fixed
Fixed
Commas
Dollars
Percent
Appropriate
Standard
Description
Contains a fixed number of decimal
places,0-7
Provides commas between thousands.
Negative amounts are in parentheses.
Contains a fixed number of decimal
places, 0-7.
Same as commas except with a dollar
sign before each amount.
A percentage with a specified number
of decimal places (0-7).
Appropriate means that /// E-Z Pieces
does its best to display numbers
exactly as you type them in. Numbers
are right justified in the column with a
blank in the leftmost position of all
columns. Trailing zeros after the
decimal place are dropped.
Standard restores the cells in the
group you specify to the worksheet
standard values.
Table 10-15.
Values for Values Layouts
Example
163
-137.00
1,345.09
(4.66)
$113.58
$1,345.09
($4.66)
$1.16
1235.7%
-4.25%
Appropriate is /// E-Z Pieces best guess for worksheet standard values for
values.
lf the number does not fit in the width you have set up for the column, the
number is stored the way you type it but pound signs (#s) are displayed.
Thus, a cell looks like this: “######”. Widen the column if necessary.
10-33
Label Formats
Four label formats are available as worksheet standard values—Left Justi-
fied, Right Justified, and Centered. Table 10-16 describes them.
Left Justified Labels are left justified in cells. -Jan -
Right Justified | Labels are right justified in cells. - Jan-
Centered Labels are centered in cells. - Jan -
Standard Standard restores the cells you specify
to the worksheet standard.
10-16.
Values for Labels Layout
Left justified is / / / E-Z Pieces’ best guess for worksheet standard values for
labels.
Column Widths
You can change the width of one or more columns, if you want. Columns
can be from 2 to 75 characters wide.
Protection
‘“OPEN-APPLE”-"L” allows you to specify which cells should be protected
and how.
— Nochanges allowed
— Only labels can be typed
— Only values can be typed
— All changes should be allowed
Protection that you specify with “OPEN-APPLE”-"L” is automatically
enforced if you haven’t changed the worksheet standard value for protec-
tion to no protection. But protection you specify with “OPEN-APPLE”-"L”
takes effect only on cells that already have entries unless you use the
“OPEN-APPLE”-“L” Protection Entry or Block option. Table 10-17 shows
the possibilities for different settings for “OPEN-APPLE”-“V” and “V” and
“OPEN-APPLE”-"L".
When “OPEN-APPLE”-“V” equals yes or no, cells are protected in certain
ways:
10-34
NTE nnn ne
pal
'_ =
‘a
sal ba
an) sa oa)
ing}
“OPEN-APPLE”-“L” options Yes No
No changes Complete protection No protection
Labels only Only labels can be typed No protection
Values only Only values can be typed No protection
Allow changes No protection No protection
Table-17
Possibilities for Cell Protection
Checking Cell Layouts
You can see layouts for a cell by checking its cell indicator. For example, a
cell with a right-justified label format says “Label, Layout-r’.
Changing Cell Layouts
Here’s how to change cell layouts:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“L”.
2. Choose “Entry”, “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”.
If youchoose: Then:
“Rows” Use the arrow keys to highlight the
rows and press “RETURN”.
“Columns” Use the arrow keys to highlight the
columns and press “RETURN”.
“Block” Use the arrow keys to highlight the
block and press “RETURN”,
3. Choose “Value format”, “Label format”, or “Protection”, depending
on whether you want to change the cell layout for values, labels, or
protection.
If you chose “Columns” in step 2, step 3 gives you an extra option: “Column
widths”.
10-35
4. If you chose: Respond as follows:
Choose “Fixed”, “Dollars”, “Com-
mas”, “Percent”, “Appropriate”, or
“Standard”
“Value format”
For all but “Appropriate” and
“Standard”, type the number of
decimal places and press
“RETURN”,
Choose “Left justify”, “Right justify”,
“Center”, or “Standard”.
“Label format”
“Column widths“ Use “OPEN-APPLE”-"“RIGHT-
ARROW” or “LEFT-ARROW?” to
change the column widths. Press
“ESCAPE” when you’re through.
“Protection” Choose “No changes”, “Labels
only”, “Values only”, or “Allow
changes”
Viewing Your Worksheet
Most often you view your worksheet in the Review/Add/Change display you
get when you first get the file. You can view the worksheet in several
different ways, however, ways that sometimes make it easier for you to see
what you want to see.
Fos example, you can split the worksheet in two, either into two side-by-side
windows ora top and bottom window. Then when you change a value in one
part, it’s easy to see the effect of the change in another part.
You can also fix the titles area in place on the display and then use the cursor
to move the rest of the worksheet. That makes it easy for you to keep track of
what numbers apply to what titles.
Setting and Removing a Fixed Titles Area
///€-Z Pieces lets you set in place a fixed titles area at the top left of the
display, or both. Figure 10-9 shows a worksheet with a fixed top titles area.
After you fix a titles area, you can use the cursor to view the rest of the
worksheet. Setting a titles area in place can make it easier for you to look at
information, because you always know what titles the information goes
with, regardless of where the information is on the worksheet.
10-36
TT i mW
am wt
Te
Escape: Main Menu
SO
File: Exp Acct
se2se5>4== =
Tem REVIEW. G00, CHANGE
B S=sF
Ts ssathenemntcimensinta neo sss Fosssse88 55S SS-S=h4225=
WEEKLY EXPENSE REPORTS V2 Corporation
MeME 3 John J, Jones
DESTINATION AND PURPOSE:
Figure 10-9.
Worksheet With Fixed Top Titles Area
To set a fixed titles area in place:
1. Put the cursor in a cell on
— The top row below the fixed titles area if the area you're fixing is on
top
— Thecolumn to the right of the fixed titles area if the area you're fixing
is on the left. If you are fixing titles area at the top and on the left, you
should put the cursor in the cell that marks the outside corner of the
non-fixed area.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"T” (for “Titles”.
3. Choose “Top”, “Left side”, or “Both”.
/// E-Z Pieces Tips
You can use all the cursor movement keystrokes
to move the cursor in the unfixed area. But you
can’t move the cursor into the fixed titles area.
Here’s how to remove the fixed titles area:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-"T”.
2. To confirm your selection of removing the titles area, press
“RETURN”.
10-37
Working with a Split Worksheet
Occasionally you may want to split the worksheet in two so you can see two
parts of it at the same time. You can split the worksheet into two side-by-side
windows or a top and bottom window.
Splitting the worksheet into two windows allows you
— To type a new value into a cell and see the result in a distant cell
— To look at two distant parts of the worksheet at the same time
Figure 10-10 and 10-11 show two split worksheets.
File: Exp Mect Temp REWTEWSA0t’ CHANGE Escape: Main Menu
seeesc= G#esses==PssS==== 0S = SS SS5 ese ss Eee aoe eee GS S====S}oeeees= [=
WEEKLY EXPENS REPORT <*¥2Z Corporation
NAME: Jenn J. Jones
DESTINATION AUD FURPOSE:
sss Eoeresunf seee22s G22==2==}==—==== ] aaa
Date Commente
-? for Help
Figure 10-10
Worksheet Split Top and Bottom
10-38
rorrmrmiememertiertnmtmtinrtrtnrtnrmh Ww
memhm
mw wih oh eh
im me ot
ve
a
ia
File: Exp Acct Temp
Sess Q essa fs=s== £
1!
71
WEEKLY EXPENSE REPORT SY? Core S!WEER ENDING:
ai
NAME : John da vones
DE STINGATION all PURPOSE:
Figure 10-11.
Worksheet Split Left and Right
This section tells how
— To split the worksheet into two windows,
— To move the cursor between two windows,
— Tosynchronize movement of the two windows, and
— Torestore the worksheet to one window.
Splitting the Worksheet Into Two Windows
To split the worksheet into two windows:
1. If you are splitting the worksheet into two side-by-side windows,
put the cursor in a cell in the column that will form the left
boundary of the righthand display.
If you are splitting the worksheet into a top and bottom window,
put the cursor in acellin the row that will form the top boundary of
the bottom display.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“W” (for Windows).
3. Choose “Side by side” or “Top and bottom” depending on
whether you want side-by-side windows or top-and-bottom
windows.
10-39
/// E-Z Pieces splits the worksheet into the windows you requested.
The cursor stays in the cell where it was in step 1.
Moving the Cursor to the Other Window
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"J” (for Jump).
/// E-Z Pieces moves the cursor to the corresponding cell in the other
window.
Synchronizing the Two Windows
After you split the worksheet into windows, the windows move independ-
ently of each other. That is, you can use the cursor movement keystrokes in
the part of the worksheet where the cursor is and the other part of the
worksheet doesn’t move. You can however, move both parts of the work-
sheet at the same time so that row for row or column for column the two
windows always match.
To synchronize the windows:
1. Make sure you have two windows displayed. (If you haven’t already
done so, press “OPEN-APPLE”-"W”.)
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“W” a second time.
3. Choose “Synchronized”.
Now whatever cursor movement keystrokes you use in one part of the
worksheet have the same effect in both parts.
Whenever you press “OPEN-APPLE”-"“W” when you have the worksheet
split into two windows, you get a variation of this menu bar:
Views? One Synchronized
If the two windows are synchronized, the second part of the response reads
“Unsynchronized”, which lets you unsynchronize the two windows.
10-40
rTrmmmrFrtrt ht mah
e——— a a oe os a a |
rm
rem mH mM
mmm i Ot UOC,
ia)
it a i
rt
t
Restoring the Worksheet to One Window
To restore the worksheet to one window:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“W”’.
2. Choose “One”.
///€-Z Pieces restores the worksheet to one window, and the information is
displayed with the worksheet standard values of the window where the
cursor was last.
Blanking Areas of the Worksheet
///€-Z Pieces allows you to blank areas of the worksheet, including entries,
rows, columns, and blocks. Here’s how:
1. Move the cursor to a cell whose entry you want to blank. This cell
becomes the pivotal point for blanking.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“B” (for Blank).
3. Choose “Entry”, “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”.
4. |f you indicated that you wantto blank rows, columns, ora block, use
the Spreadsheet’s cursor movement keystrokes to highlight the area
you want to blank. Then press “RETURN”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
A blanked cell referred to by a formula is consi-
dered to contain a 0.
Cells can't be blanked when you have used the
“OPEN-APPLE"-"L” command to specify they
should have No Changes and protection is set to
yes.
Cells that are protected for Labels Only or
Values Only, however, are blanked and lose their
protection.
10-41
Deleting Rows or Columns Inserting Rows or Columns
To delete rows or columns from your worksheet:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“D”.
Here’s how to insert blank rows or columns into your worksheet, up to a
maximum of 9:
m kh ih
1. Place the cursor on the row below or on the column to the right of
2. Choose “Rows” or “Columns”. ;
which you want the inserted rows or columns to go.
3. Move the cursor to highlight the rows or columns you want to delete. = é ‘i een
Then press “RETURN”. 2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“l” (for Insert).
3. Choose “Rows” or “Columns”.
ie
WARNING
///€-Z Pieces deletes the entire row or column
you specify, not just the part displayed. Before
you start, you will probably want to move the
cursor through the whole area you are intending
to delete, to make sure you know exactly what
you're deleting.
mn Ee
4. Type the number of blank rows or columns you want to insert and
press “RETURN”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
/// E-Z Pieces reletters the columns to the right
of the inserted columns. And it renumbers the
rows at the bottom of the inserted rows. It also
reworks formulas that refer to these relettered
If you delete rows or columns whose contents a columns and renumbered rows so the formulas
are used in formulas in other cells, // / E-Z Pie- refer to the proper cells.
eed ge ol See oo —_ oe a The cells in the rows or columns you insert have worksheet standards.
ee en ere —_ There are two limitations on inserting rows and columns:
“ERROR” indicates the formula can’t work
because some or all of the values it needs were
deleted or don’t exist. Deleting rows or columns
can have implications on your calculations,
therefore.
When rows or columns are deleted, the part of
the worksheet on the bottom or on the right is
closed up. Closed up rows are renumbered and
closed up columns are relettered./ / / E-Z Pieces
reworks formulas to take this renumbering and
relettering into account so the formulas refer to
cells they originally referred to.
10-42
Fe
FE rr — —_ EE SS oe eee
line
1. You can't insert rows or columns that would push existing informa-
tion past the worksheet limits. For example, you can’t insert 10 rows
anywhere unless rows 990 through 999 are empty.
2. You can't insert rows or columns after the cursor is past existing
information. For example, if the last row with information in itis 125,
then you can't insert rows past row 125.
Moving Columns or Rows Within a Worksheet
///€-Z Pieces allows you to move up to 250 rows or 125 columns from one
place in a worksheet to another:
1. Place the cursor onacellin the column or row or one of the columns
or rows you want moved.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"“M”.
3. Choose “Columns” or “Rows”.
4. Choose “Within Worksheet”.
10-43
o. Move the cursor to highlight the columns or rows you want moved.
Then press “RETURN”.
6. Move the cursor to the place where you want the moved columns or
rows to go. (The moved columns or rows are inserted to the left of
the cursor for columns or above the cursor for rows.) Then press
“RETURN”,
///E-Z Pieces Tips
A significant amount of movement happens dur-
ing a Move:
— First, ///E-Z Pieces closes up the space the
columns or rows come from.
— Then it opens up space for the moved columns
or rows and inserts them.
— Allcolumns are relettered accordingly, and rows
are renumbered.
— Formulas are adjusted to take care of references
to moved columns or rows, so that all formulas
still refer to the proper cells.
Copying Information
///€-Z Pieces copy features makes it easy for you to create sophisticated
worksheets with a minimum of effort. You can make an exact copy of labels,
numbers, pointers, and formulas from one cell or group of cells into another,
quickly and with no typing errors. You can also copy pointers and formulas
into other cells and make the copies depend on their new location. That
means you can make many similar calculations depend on one original
formula.
Before you copy, you should think about the answer to three questions:
— What cell or cells are you copying from?
— What cell or cells are you copying to?
— Are you copying the contents exactly, or do you want the copy to
depend on the position of the copied-to cells?
10-44
SS LL
er a a i i i |
nme Mm mM
ee i oi 6h COU
sa
ml
ial
te
What Are the Copy-From Cells
You can copy from one cell or from a range of cells. The only guideline is
that the cells must be adjacent, that is, all in the same row and next to each
other, or all in the same column and one under the other.
What Are the Copy-To Cells
You can copy to one Cell or to a range of cells. The copy-to cells must be
adjacent. You can copy rows to rows and columns to columns, but you can't
copy rows to columns or columns to rows.
Figures 10-12 through 10-19 show the possible combinations of copied-
from and copied-to cells.
Copy-From Cell is B2.
Copy-To Cell is C2.
Figure 10-12
Copying One Cell to Another
10-45
th
Copy-From Cell is A1.
Copy-To Cells are B1 through E1.
\
Copy-From Cell is A1.
Copy-To Cells are A2 through AS.
Tm mW
td
——_—_—_e_J_—S es Oe $9 _—0Vv—m" cw 8 ee eee ee ee ee eee ee 0 eee
~
ta
File: Cop, Oeme REVTEW/AOD CHANGE Escape; Main Meru
Filter Copy Deme PEM LEW AOD «CHANGE
SSeS SsS4eSssernn Peess==-S= 9 =S===SSsS[ eee
t! te! 6! 41 al Hi
2!
31
4a}
oa
—
Figure 10-13.
Copying One Cell to A Row of Cells
ia.
Figure 10-15.
Copying One Cell to a Range of Cells
- ~
Copy-From Cell is A1
Copy-To Cells are C2 through C5. Copy-From Cells are A1 through AS.
Copy-To Cells are B1 through B5.
PET El AOL CHMGE Escape: Main Menu
File: Copy Oemo
Pae=ss==2e2eCses=====f[ S=esecs=f====S222F eee
i) =)
Figure 10-14.
Copying One Cell to a Column of Cells Figure 10-16.
Copying a Column
mrmwamaerereremam eee
ve
in 5
10-46
10-47
uh
Copy-From Cells are A1 through AS.
Copy-To Cells are B1 through BS, C1 through Cs, D1 through Ds.
im tb
Figure 10-17.
Copying a Column Several Times
Copy-From Cells are Ai through C1.
Copy-To Cells are B3 through D3.
Figure 10-18.
Copying a Row
ee ee eee eee eee eee ees ee
i
a aaa aaa
10-48
Copy-From Cells are A1 through C1.
Copy-To Cells are C3 through E3, C4 through E4, and C5 through E5.
Figure 10-19.
Copying a Row Several Times
Copy the Contents Exactly
lf you copy the copy-from cells into the copy-to cells exactly, then labels,
numbers, pointers, and formulas are copied exactly, with no changes.
Figure 10-20 illustrates such a copy.
Figure 10-20.
An Exact Copy
10-49
Copy the Contents Depending on Their New Position
You can copy the contents of cells into other cells and make the new
contents depend on the position of the copy-to cells. Then every time a
copy-from cell references another cell, the cell reference is changed to
depend on the position of the copied-to cell. This kind of copy is called a
relative copy. Figure 10-21 illustrates such a copy.
m fh th
6. If you're making one copy, press “RETURN”. If you're making sev-
eral copies, press “.”. Then use the arrow keys to highlight the other
copy-to cells. Then press “RETURN”.
. /// E-Z Pieces then tells you the contents of each of the copy-from
cells and asks you if you want to make an exact copy of each
reference to another cell. / / / E-Z Pieces highlights the referenced
cells in the entry line as you go. Choose “No change” or “Relative”
=e fess =s8b ===
WEEF ENDING:
Figure 10-21.
A Relative Copy
Steps for Copying
To copy the contents of cells to other cells:
_ Put the cursor on the cell you want to copy. If you're copying cells
from a row or acolumn, put the cursor on the leftmost or rightmost
cell in the row or the topmost or bottommost cell in the column.
_ Press “OPEN-APPLE’-“C”.
_ Choose “Within worksheet”.
_ Use the arrow keys to highlight the copy-from cells. Then press
“RETURN”.
_ Move the cursor to the cell you are copying to. If you're copying cells
to arow oracolumn, put the cursor on the leftmost cell of the row or
the topmost cell in the column.
10-50
bal
Cn ne
i le WW ww ue ok a
lei
for each cell referenced as /// E-Z Pieces highlights each one.
Ss
///E-Z Pieces Tips
For quick copying, type “N” or “R” in step 7,
above.
///E-Z Pieces copies labels with no questions
asked.
Calculating New Values
Your worksheet standard value may provide for automatic recalculation
whenever you type in a new value, or it may provide for manual recalcula-
tion. Then ///E-Z Pieces recalculates new values only when you give the
sign. (Automatic recalculation is // / E-Z Pieces’ best guess for when you'll
want to recalculate.)
Here's how to give the sign:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“kK”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
The “OPEN-APPLE’-“V” (standard Values) com-
mand lets you specify manual or automatic fre-
quency of recalculation and appropriate, rows,
or columns order of recalculation. See “Working
with Worksheet Standard Values.”
10-51
Actually, // / E-Z Pieces recalculates all formu-
las in the worksheet during recalculation. That
means the ones it has already done as well as the
Ones you have just provided new values for.
Because /// E-Z Pieces has to keep recalculat-
ing old values, automatic recalculation may slow
you down a bit. (/// E-Z Pieces is fast, but hav-
ing to recalculate old values just makes extra
work.) Manual recalculation may be better for
you if you don't always need recalculation as
soon as you type a new value or if your work-
sheet is large.
Sometimes /// E-Z Pieces can’t make a calcula-
tion, either because a referenced cell has been
deleted or because a formula doesn’t make
sense. If so, /// E-Z Pieces displays “ERROR” in
cells where it can’t calculate.
Arranging Information in the Worksheet
///€-Z Pieces lets you arrange, or sort, rows in worksheet by the values of
entries in a certain column in the row. You can arrange rows in alphabetical
order from A to Z or Z to A, or in numeric order from 9 to 0 or 0 to 9.
To arrange rows:
1. Move the cursor to the column that contains the information by
which you want your rows arranged.
2. If you're arranging only specific rows, move the cursor to the top or
bottom of the group of rows you want arranged.
3. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"A".
4. Use the Spreadsheet's cursor movement keystrokes to highlight the
rows you want to arrange. Then press “RETURN”.
5. Choose the way you want the rows arranged.
10-52
Pr em OOOO
aaa a aera eae Ok eaitk]
nmr mH M/
///E-Z Pieces Tips
Suppose you want to arrange rows using a
column containing numbers, and you are sorting
the numbers from 0 to 9, that is, from smallest to
largest. Suppose, also, that some of the entries in
the sorting column are labels, which you do not
want to sort. Then you would sort only the rows
with numbers in the column, skipping the rows
with labels. Do this by arranging only certain
rows.
///E-Z Pieces does not distinguish between
upper- and lowercase letters when it arranges.
Finding a Cell or Specific Information
///€-Z Pieces helps you find a cell whose coordinates you specify. It also
helps you find information contained in cells.
In addition, you can ask for the next occurence of the last information you
had/// E-Z Pieces find. This part of the find feature makes it easy for you to
find more than one occurence of the same information.
After you tell / / / E-Z Pieces what you want to find, / / / E-Z Pieces move the
cursor to the first occurence of what you specify.
To find a cell or specific information:
1. Put the cursor anywhere in the worksheet where you want /// E-Z
Pieces to begin searching.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"F”.
3. Choose “Repeat last”, “Coordinates”. or “Text”. If you choose
“Repeat last”, / / / E-Z Pieces searches for the last text you specified.
4. If you chose “Coordinates”, // / E-Z Pieces asks you to provide the
coordinates of the cell you want. Type the coordinates, such as
“A19” or “B12” and press “RETURN”.
5. If youchoose “Text”, // / E-Z Pieces asks you to provide the specific
text you want to find. The text can be up to 25 characters long.
10-53
Press “RETURN” after you type the text.
/ / / E-Z Pieces does not differentiate between upper- and lowercase letters
when it searches for text. It also finds text that is part of a word or expression.
For example,
If you type ///€-Z Pieces finds:
Income Income
Netincome
Net Incomes:
INCOME
Gas Ford-gas
Gas & Electric
Gasoline
gasoline
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces searches for information across
rows and then down the worksheet.
Changing the Name of Your File
Here's how to change the name of your file:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"N”.
2. Type the new name of the file. The name can be up to 15 characters
long. It must start with a letter, and it can contain upper- and lower-
case letters, numbers, spaces, and periods. Then press “RETURN”.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
///E-Z Pieces changes the name of the file on
the desktop. When you save the file, it is saved
with the new name. That means you still have the
file under its old name, if itis an old file. You may
want to delete the file from the disk under its old
name.
Changing the name of the file is one way to keep
several copies of the same file and make sure
you know the difference between them.
10-54
Cn
Chapter 11
Reporting in the Spreadsheet
Determining What Information to Include ..............2 eee ee eens 11-1
Determining the Width of Your Report .......... 0. cee eee ee ee ee eee 11-1
Using Printer Options 0 cwcasns a csw ws aivies secetiee anton are wee ened oereen 11-2
Lett and Right: Margin. OpTiONS: iss visu ecewwimieae wow domeews ees 11-3
TOP afc BONO MarainOPlons sacs sca eee conway een wees ows BOK 11-4
Other FOrnmaning OSuGNsS: ies sce cs so esins ca oes ce 4 1we eee owe 11-6
Determining Spacing in Reports .........cecccccscsscsceveees 11-7
The Spreadsheet’s “printer options”, which are specifications about your
report, communicate information to your printer about how reports should
look. Each worksheet has printer options, which you can change for a
specific report.
In addition to setting printer options for reports, you also can determine
exactly what information to include and the width of your report.
Determining What Information to Include
When you plan a Spreadsheet report, you decide what information to
include: all the information in the worksheet, certain rows or columns, ora
block of information anywhere in the worksheet.
lf you choose to printall the information, / / / E-Z Pieces sets the boundaries
for the report as the area of the worksheet that contains information. If you
choose to print certain rows, columns, ora block of information, you set the
boundaries yourself by highlighting the information to include.
You tell / // E-Z Pieces exactly what information to include when you print.
Determining the Width of Your Report
Your report can’t be any wider than the number of characters allowed per
line according to the printer options for the worksheet and the information
about your printer that you specify using Other Activities Menu option 7,
“Specify information about your printer(s)”.
NOTE:
See Chapter 13 for information about ///E-Z
Pieces and your printer.
The steps you take to check your report's width are the same steps you take
when you print. Follow these steps to make sure your report isn’t too wide:
1. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"P”.
2. Specify how much you want to print by choosing “All”, “Rows”,
“Columns”, or “Block”.
3. For “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”, use the cursor to highlight the
area you want to print.
4. Check the information on the Print Menu that tells you how wide
your report will be. If it’s too wide, press ESCAPE to return to
Review/Add/Change so you can replan your report. If it’s not,
continue printing steps.
NOTE:
Chapter 13 contains complete instructions for
printing a Spreadsheet report.
Using Printer Options
Here’s the Open Apple command that lets you work with printer options:
Indicate that you want to work
with printer options Press OPEN-APPLE and “O” from
Review/Add/Change.
Return to Review/Add/Change
after you have finished with the
printer options Press ESCAPE.
After you indicate you want to work with printer options, /// E-Z Pieces
presents the Printer Options display, which looks like the display illustrated
in Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1.
Printer Options for Spreadsheet Reports
11-2
eo re
a se es eo ee ee ees ees 2 2 eee 2
rome moe om om om om
‘ai kaa ea a Oak
"mm maOUuhMCUm
Left and Right Margin Options
Table 11-1 describes left and right margin options.
The Print Option:
“Platen width (PW)”
“Left margin (LM)”
“Right margin (RM)”
‘Characters per Inch”
Controls
The distance in inches the
printer’s printhead travels across
the paper. The left edge of the
paper should correspond to
where the printhead stops on the
left.
This number can be no greater
than the platen width you specify
in Other Activities Menu option
“Specify information about your
printer(s)”.
Best guess = 8.0 inches
The maximum you can use is 13.2
inches.
The width of the left margin in
inches
Numbers may be in tenths inches,
that is 1.5 inches, 1.6 inches, 2.0
inches.
Best guess = 0 Inches
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
The width of the right margin in
inches
Numbers may be in tenths of
inches.
Best guess = 0 inches
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
The number of printed characters
per inch
11-3
Characters per inch can be from 4
through 24.
Best guess = 10 characters per
inch
Table 11-1.
Left and Right Margin Options for Spreadsheet Reports
When you change any of the above values, //E-Z Pieces instantly
recalculates the line width and the estimated characters per line according
to the following formulas:
Platen width For example: 8.0 inches
- Left margin - 1.5 inches
- Right margin - 1.0 inches
= Line width = 5.5 inches
x Chars per inch X 12 Characters per incn
= Chars per line = 66 characters per line
Follow these steps to change the value of the left and right margin options:
1. After getting the Printer Options display, type the code that stands
for the option and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the new value for the option and press “RETURN”. You don't
have to type “.0” if the new value is a whole number. For example, if
the new right margin is 1 inch, type “1”.
Top and Bottom Margin Options
Table 11-2 describes top and bottom margin options.
The Printer Option: Controls
“Paper length (PL)” The vertical measurement of the
paper you are using, in inches
Best guess = 11 inches
The maximum you can use is 25.4
inches.
11-4
oni oan) @f)06 69) OG
|
7
|
in] ew
f
ss oR
7m) os |
rer orem
im bh bh
tal
iS
i
=
“Top margin (TM)”
“Bottom margin (BM)”
“Lines per inch (LI)”
The length in inches from the top
of the paper to the first line of
printing
Best guess = 0.0 inches. This best
guess accommodates /// E-Z
Pieces users who have sheet feed
printers (printers with no tractor).
If you have one of these printers,
you should leave the best guess
at 0 and position the paper
exactly where you want the first
line to be.
lf you have a tractor feed printer,
you will probably want to change
this value.
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
The length in inches from the last
line of printing to the bottom of
the paper
Best guess = 1.0 inches
The maximum you can use is 9.0
inches.
How many lines will be printed
per vertical inch on the page
Best guess = 6
You can use 6 or 8.
Table 11-2.
Top and Bottom Margin Options for Spreadsheet Reports
11-5
When you change any of the above values, / / / E-Z Pieces instantly recalcu-
lates the printing length and the lines per page according to the following
formulas:
Paper length For example: 11.0 inches
~ Top margin - 2.0 inches
- Bottom margin - 1.5 inches
= Printing length = 7.5 inches
x lines per inch Xx 6 lines per inch
45 lines per page
lines per page =
Follow these steps to change the value of the top and bottom margin
options:
1. After getting the “PRINTER OPTIONS" display, type the code that
stands for the option and press “RETURN”.
2. Type the new value for the option and press “RETURN”. You don't
have to type “0.” if the new value is a whole number. For example, if
the new top margin is 1 inch, type “1”.
Other Formatting Options
Table 11-3 describes other formatting options.
The Printer Option: Controls
“Send Special Codes to Printer
(SC)” Use this code if you want your
printer to use a feature not
provided for in Spreadsheet
reports, such as proportional
spacing or boldface. To find out
what special codes your printer
can use, check in the manual that
came with it.
This printer option can have the
value “yes” or “no”.
Best guess = “no”
11-6
rr wae eee Oe
rm
a |
me oi eer heer esse Or sé
It you change the option to “yes”,
///€-Z Pieces asks for the con-
characters.
Type the control characters and
type ““” when you have finished,
If you change this option to “yes”,
you must include control codes
for characters per inch.
“Print Report Header at top of
each page (PH)” The report header consists of the
file name and the date. If you
don't print a report header, only
information from the worksheet is
printed.
The value for this option can be
“yes” or “no”.
Best guess = “no”
Table 11-3.
Other Formatting Options for Spreadsheet Reports
To change the value of the above options:
1. After you get the Printer Options display, type the code that stands
for the option and press “RETURN”.
///E-Z Pieces automatically changes the value to its opposite.
Determining Spacing in Reports
You may specify whether you want your report to be single, double, or triple
spaced. ///E-Z Pieces’ best guess is single spacing.
Here’s how to change the spacing:
1. After you get the Printer Options display, type the code that stands
for the spacing you want, “SS” for single spacing, “DS” for double
spacing, or “TS” for triple spacing. Then press “RETURN”.
TL AL |
mW
mmm mM
i ol i i it iW i Wm i hm wei Ww Hm WIth
at
Chapter 12
Using Cut and Paste
Flow Does CUTAN PaSIO WOH? oc. cece ccs nswenamessekeweue eee 6 12-1
Cut and Paste With Data Base Information..................e0e- 12-3
Moving or Copying Data Base Records to Another Data Base
FUP CGR GEN GWE GOS HOR EWRTTS EKKDER AT ERid ce erramenrmmmn et 12-3
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for a Word Processor
LAGU » 208 ren die meso does es ews esa wee YEN eon EER Ss 12-5
Cut and Paste With Word Processor Documents ................ 12-6
Cut and Paste With Spreadsheet Information ................... 12-7
Moving or Copying Spreadsheet Information to Another
SERGE ORCINUS cxnsmantimacne OREO Ris pew ame mumeceun 12-7
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for a Word Processor
LJOCUIABIY crass cae 8G: 5°0S.05 GENS OHS HOD KSA HER ere own ceed 12-8
“Cut and paste” ina home or office situation is an activity where you transfer
information from one place to another. Perhaps you use scissors to cut
several paragraphs from one letter and paste or tape them into another. Or
perhaps you paste a list of names and addresses or financial information
into a report while you're writing it.
///€-Z Pieces does these activities for you electronically. The cut and paste
feature gives you complete flexibility in mixing and matching information
types. It also lets you format professional-looking documents in a minimum
of time.
This chapter tells generally how cut and paste works. It also provides
specific instructions for using cut and paste in the Data Base, Word Proces-
sor, and spreadsheet.
How Does Cut and Paste Work?
When you use cut and paste, you use the “clipboard”, which is a ///E-Z
Pieces term that refers to a part of the computer’s memory that holds
information for cut and paste. The clipboard can hold up to 250 lines of
information.
NOTE:
The “clipboard” is a part of the computer's
memory that holds cut and paste information.
12-1
You transfer (“cut”) information from a///E-Z
Pieces file to the clipboard. And you transfer
(“paste”) the information from the clipboard to
another /// E-Z Pieces file.
When you transfer information, you can
— Move it from a file to the clipboard or from the
clipboard to a file. Then it’s gone from the file it was in
or from the clipboard.
Or
— Copy it from a file to the clipboard or from the
clipboard to a file. Then it remains in the file it was in or
on the clipboard.
— Print Data Base or Spreadsheet information to the
clipboard and then move or copy it into a Word
Processor file. If you move it, it’s gone from the
clipboard. If you copy it, a copy stays on the clipboard.
Figure 12-1 shows how you can move, copy, or print information between
the different kinds of files. The callouts refer to the numbers in the text.
“Paste To”
DATA BASE
SPREADSHEET
WORD PROCESSOR
“Cut From”
DATA BASE
SPREADSHEET
Move or Copy
WORD PROCESSOR
Move or Copy
Figure 12-1.
Cutting and Pasting
Move or Copy
Clipboard ©
12-2
mame ae OOOO reo
"mH Mm
"mmm mM
_ eS el
— FS CS
‘iit oi
al
1. You can move or copy Data Base records, Word Processor lines, or
Spreadsheet rows to the clipboard and then to another file of the
same type.
2. Youcan formata Data Base or Spreadsheet report and print itto the
clipboard, then move or copy it into a Word Processor document.
Work you do with files on the Desktop in no way disturbs the contents of the
clipboard. Only these activities change the contents of the clipboard:
— Moving information to the clipboard, which erases what was there
previously
— Copying information to the clipboard, which erases what was there
previously
— Moving information from the clipboard, which erases what you
move after you move it
— Quitting /// E-Z Pieces, which causes the contents of the clipboard
to be lost
Cut and Paste With Data Base Information
Cut and Paste allows you to transfer a total of 250 Data Base records withina
Data Base file, between two Data Base files, or to a Word Processor
document. You can transfer only complete records, not parts of records
within a file or between two Data Base files. When you format a Data Base
report and transfer it to a Word Processor document, you can use parts of
records.
The following information describes the cut and paste activities you can use
with the Data Base and tells how to do them. It tells how
— To Move or Copy complete Data Base records to another Data Base
file on the Desktop
— ToPrinta Data Base report to the clipboard and then Move or Copy it
to a Word Processor document
Moving or Copying Data Base Records to
Another Data Base File
To move or copy records from one Data Base file to another:
1. Get the file you want to move the records from, and make sure you're
in Review/Add/Change multiple-record layout.
2. Put the cursor in an entry on the top or bottom record of the group
you want to move or copy.
12-3
10.
. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"M" to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“C” to Copy.
. Choose “To clipboard (cut)”.
. Move the cursor to highlight the records you want to move or copy.
Then press “RETURN”. The records move to the clipboard.
. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"“Q” to get the Desktop Index. Choose the
Data Base file you want to move or copy the records to. (Youcan add
the file to the Desktop now if it’s not there already.)
. Make sure you're in Review/Add/Change multiple-record layout in
tne new file.
. Move the cursor to the record above which you want to move the
records.
. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"M” to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“C” to Copy.
Choose “From clipboard (paste)”. At this point, ///E-Z Pieces
moves or copies the records from the clipboard.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
If you want to move only specific records,
choose them with ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“F” or by for-
mulating Record Selection Rules (‘OPEN-
APPLE”-“R”). Then use “OPEN-APPLE”-“M” or
“C” to move or copy them.
Moving or copying records from one Data Base
file to another allows you to merge two files.
///E-Z Pieces won't let you move every record
from a file, however. (A Data Base file has to have
at least one record!) You can merge all the
records in one file with another file, however.
Here’s how:
First, create a blank record in the first file.
Second, move all the records but the blank one.
The throw away the original file. Ingenious!
When you merge files, however, pay attention to
the maximum records per file limitatior
The files you transfer records between should
match each other in numbers of catagories. Left
over catagories will be dropped.
12-4
—e——__—_—— A
I en) oa) on) om,
"nm a Oe OOOO
‘A
ke. ——
m om
ai) il
"mm MT
NOTE:
See Data Base File Guidelines on page 3-5.
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for
Word Processor Document
When you want to add Data Base information to your Word Processor
documents, you formata Data Base report, printit to the clipboard, and then
copy or move it into your Word Processor document. Here's how:
1;
Create the report format for the Data Base information you want to
transfer to your Word Processor document. (Follow instructions in
Chapter 2 to do so.)
. Press ‘"OPEN-APPLE”-“P” to indicate you want to print the report.
. Choose the clipboard as the printing destination.
. Type the report date if your report has a header, and press
“RETURN”. Otherwise, just press “RETURN”. /// E-Z Pieces dis-
plays a message that tells you the report has been put on the
clipboard.
. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“Q” to get the Desktop Index. Then choose
the Word Processor document you want. (You can add the file to the
Desktop now if it’s not there already.)
. Move the cursor to the place where you want to insert the Data Base
report.
. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“M” if you want to move the information into
the document, or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"C” if you want to copy it.
. Choose “From clipboard (Paste)” in response to “Move?” or
“Copy?”.
///E-Z Pieces instantly transfers the formatted report into the specified
place in the Word Processor document.
lf you moved the report into the document, it no longer exists on the
clipboard. If you copied it into the document, it still exists on the clipboard.
12-5
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you create the Data Base report format,
pay particular attention to the number of charac-
ters per line in the report. If your Data Base
report lines are wider than the number of charac-
ters per line in your Word Processor document,
they will wrap around.
You can find the number of characters per line
on Data Base reports by moving the cursor all
the way to the right on the “REPORT FORMAT”
screen. If the page is wide enough when you
print, however, the lines will unwrap.
You can edit your Data Base report after you get
it into the Word Processor document, just like the
rest of the document.
Cut and Paste with Word Processor Documents
Occasionally information you have included in one Word Processor docu-
ment would be more appropriate in an other or in both. /// E-Z Pieces’ cut
and paste feature makes it easy to move or copy up to 250 lines from one
Word Processor document to another. Here’s how:
1. Get the document you want to move or copy the information from.
2. Put the cursor at the first or last character of the information you
want to move.
3. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“M” to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"C” to Copy.
4. Choose “To clipboard (cut)”.
5. Move the cursor to highlight the information you want to move. Then
press “RETURN”. Now the information is moved or copied to the
clipboard.
6. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“Q” to get the Desktop Index. Choose the
document you want to move or copy the information to. (You can
add the file to the Desktop now, if it’s not already there.)
7. Move the cursor to the place where you want to move the
information.
8. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“M” to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"“C” to Copy.
9. Choose “From clipboard (paste)”. At this point ///E-Z Pieces
moves or copies the records from the clipboard into the document.
12-6
i
///E-Z Pieces Tips
You can move or copy information within the
same document, too. Just leave out step 6,
above.
Cut and Paste With Spreadsheet Information
Cut and Paste allows you to transfer 250 rows within a file, between
Spreadsheet files, or to a Word Processor document. You can transfer parts
of a file or a report containing the whole file.
The following information describes the cut and paste activities you Can use
with the Spreadsheet and tells how to do them. It tells how to
— Move or copy Spreadsheet information to another Spreadsheet file
on the Desktop
— Printa Spreadsheet report to the clipboard and then move or copy it
to a Word Processor document
Moving or Copying Spreadsheet Information to
Another Spreadsheet File
Here’s how to move or copy information from one Spreadsheet file to
another:
1. Get the file you want to move or copy the rows from.
2. Move the cursor to a cell on the top or bottom row of the group of
rows you want to move or copy.
3. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“M” to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"C” to Copy.
4. Choose “To clipboard (cut)”.
5. Move the cursor to highlight the rows you want to move. Then press
“RETURN”. The rows are moved or copied to the clipboard.
6. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"“Q” to get the Desktop Index. Choose the file
you want to move the records to. (Add the file to the Desktop now, if
it’s not already there.)
7. Move the cursor to the place where you want to move or copy the
information.
8. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"“M” to Move or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"C” to Copy.
12-7
9. Choose “From clipboard (paste)”. At this point, ///E-Z Pieces
moves or copies the information form the clipboard.
Printing a Report to the Clipboard for a
Word Processor Document
When you want to add Spreadsheet information to your Word Processor
documents, you format a Spreadsheet report, print it to the clipboard, and
then copy or move it into your Word Processor document. Here’s how:
1. Get the Spreadsheet file you want to make a report from.
. Press "OPEN-APPLE”-“P” to indicate you want to print the report.
. Choose “All”, “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”.
. Highlight the area you want to print and press “RETURN”.
. Choose the clipboard as the printing destination.
oOo on ff W PP
. Type a date for the report header if your report has one. /// E-Z
Pieces displays a message that tells you the report has been put on
the clipboard.
7. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-"“Q” to get the Desktop Index. Then choose
the Word Processor document you want.
8. Move the cursor to the place where you want to insert the
Spreadsheet report.
9. Press ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“M” if you want to move the information into
the document, or ‘OPEN-APPLE”-“C” if you want to copy it.
10. Choose “From clipboard (Paste)”.
/// E-Z Pieces instantly transfers the formatted report, which includes data
but not formulas, into the specified place in the Word Processor document.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
When you create the Spreadsheet report format,
pay particular attention to the number of charac-
ters per line in the report. Your Spreadsheet
report lines can be 75 characters wide maximum.
You can edit your Spreadsheet report after you
get it into the Word Processor document, just like
the rest of the document.
12-8
rlh Wh Wthtrti ht mW mtmmttTt Mw Ww
mm mW
mm m7
i |
a ob
th
Al
nb Ww Wm hk HH HW ih kh MH Ul
rm
Chapter 13
Printers and Printing
Methods of Printing........... On ee Te 13-2
Pritting 16 a Prmintel sis case was ne0 nes 606 BN ewe 045 ETRE TONS e OH 13-3
Printing) 10 DSK: ies cus crac ew saad e089 Han 005 HOR KEN $50 RETR URS 13-3
Printing 6 @ TERWASCID Pil@ sca cnc ces wes Sch 20S 5S Ba ASR RS 13-3
PRG TS TIS CSB ORS oo cited ove eran dealined keweed naw Bie ovis 13-4
PRT SARE Ne NE ake escec Rancnr iln deat etka wcnsbaseca indi nentbnemes atom ntion wrth 13-4
PTAEUEEAGS SEP WET CRON. crese erecta titel Waa teen asuen tice wien Cite sem wcetecn 13-4
Printing a Hard Copy ‘of the Display’ « sssic6< wos cae ene sien coe wane 13-4
ADOUT PHIClSss:<.042s9< a05 05 Has ces} ORs B55. E52 SOT AEH EDO BEE HOT EHES 13-5
Specifying Information About Your Printer ...............eeeee eae 13-6
PE ee ois NSS ES FAKE RA TRS, WER ES SDS 13-6
Pe ERIN scars esis Winch ebb trle Sikal> elene tia Sesion cevalbvet 13-9
CHANGING PrINTOF SHPOCIICATIONS:.. x1-2:0:0s.w era nae anew exe wipw ecowiwinw 6 13-9
Ghanging the Display Printer’ sas scesicaaccene cusses etre we see 13-10
PHN os eet esis emeres peed ne Ree sew Wee ERS BE HEWSON BERT 13-10
Privitingy Data BASS RODOINS 65 ess cay com vane see weeous esaeeeen 13-10
Printing Word Processor Documents ...........++eeeeeeceee 13-11
Peel GIES UITNOD CPU TRUUSGMCD oc 5, 55055) ara Mvacne, rstae eudvelreereaeeontiaiod: Mecnenivere 13-11
PAUSING ANGE EACH PAGC» ncsceccnze sits: stem rececnema ase: ee meeniint 13-12
POUsING (1-SRRCHIC PIGGS xiwacrs wee Hen edmaees Hee RO 13-12
Printing Spreadsheet Reports ........... ccc cece sweet ees 13-12
///€-Z Pieces is flexible in its ability to print in different ways and to
different devices. It’s also flexible in its ability to communicate with different
printers. This chapter tells all you need to know to make use of that
flexibility.
13-1
Methods of Printing
You are probably used to thinking of printing reports on printers. In addition
to that method of printing, however, /// E-Z Pieces can “print” formatted
reports, files, and parts of files onto flexible disks or ProFile. Each of /// E-Z
Pieces’ three software tools has its own methods of printing. All the printing
methods are available when you print, as discussed in “Printing” in this
chapter, except printing a copy of the display, which is available anytime.
Figure 13-1 shows the different ways you can use /// E-Z Pieces to print.
The callouts refer to the numbers in the text.
1. The Data Base, the Word Processor, and the Spreadsheet print
reports to a printer.
2. All three software tools print a formatted report on a disk.
3. All three software tools print text (ASCII) files.
4. The Data Base and the Spreadsheet print formatted reports on the
clipboard.
5. The Data Base and the Spreadsheet print DIF files.
6. The Data Base prints formatted reports on the screen.
7. You can always print a copy of the display on a printer.
WORD
PROCESSOR SPREADSHEET
1, REPORT TO 1. REPORT TO
A PRINTER A PRINTER
2. REPORT ON DISK 2, REPORT ON DISK
3. ASCII FILES
1, REPORT TO
A PRINTER
2, REPORT ON DISK
4, REPORT ON
CLIPBOARD
5. DIF FILES
4, REPORT ON
CLIPBOARD
5. DIF FILES
6. REPORT ON SCREEN
7, COPY OF DISPLAY
ON PRINTER
7. COPY OF DISPLAY 7, COPY OF DISPLAY
ON PRINTER ON PRINTER
Figure 13-1.
Different Ways /// E-Z Pieces Prints
13-2
— Ee ———SES——S——EES—————— A a a 2 6
“lw mW mWmWih mh Wm Hh Hh U
“mi i rk Oh OCU
Printing to a Printer
When you print a Data Base report, a Word Processor document, or a
Spreadsheet report to a printer, you first format the report or document
using the features available in the software tool you're using. You also set
the printer options to communicate the right information to the printer—
margins, spacing, etc. When you print, you specify the printer you want to
print to.
Printing to Disk
Sometimes you want to create a report, but you’re not able to print it at the
same time. Perhaps the printer isn't available. Or perhaps you are creating a
report with the Apple computer in your office and you want to use the Apple
computer in the next office to print the report.
Instead of making a hard copy of a report, as you do when you print toa
printer, you can print the report on a disk. When the report is printed on the
disk, it gets all the correct formatting and printer codes just as if it were being
printed on the printer. After you print the report, ///E-Z Pieces can no
longer use it. You use programs such as the Pascal Filer or your system
utilities to transfer the report to a printer.
To make use of this capability, you must add a printer following instructions
in “Adding a Printer” and assign it to disk when you add it. The printer you
add should be the same kind you are going to print with ultimately, so the
report will have the proper printing codes. Then, when you print to disk, you
choose this printer and supply the pathname for the report you are printing.
You must still save your file as a /// E-Z Pieces file after you print to disk.
When you print the report on a disk, the report becomes a file, so you must
assign it a file name.
Printing to a Text (ASCII) File
You can print your Data Base report, your Word Processor document, or
your Spreadsheet report into a text (ASCII) file. Then you can use the text
file as input to other programs.
Text files do not contain special printing codes and printer options.
But
— Word Processor documents you print to a text file contain the same
Carriage returns as the document.
13-3
— Data Base reports you print to a text file have carriage returns
following each entry in the report.
— Spreadsheet reports printed to a text file have carriage returns fol-
lowing each cell.
Text files that you print from the Spreadsheet can be used as a source for
Data Base files.
You must still save your file as a/// E-Z Pieces file after you print to a text
file. When you printa text file, the report becomes a file, so you must assign it
a filename.
Printing to a Clipboard
After you format a Data Base or Spreadsheet report, you can print it toa
clipboard. Then you can move or copy it into a Word Processor document.
Printing to a DIF File
DIF files save data in a format to be used by other programs. You can print
(or “save”) Data Base and Spreadsheet reports as DIF files for input to other
programs. DIF files you print from the Spreadsheet can be used as a source
for Data Base files, and vice versa.
When you print to disk, the report becomes a file, so you must assign it a
filename. You must still save your file as a/ // E-Z Pieces file after you print it
to a DIF file.
Printing to the Screen
You can check your Data Base reports before you print them by printing the
reports to the screen first.
Printing a Hard Copy of the Display
Any time you need a hard copy of the screen display, press “OPEN-APPLE”-
“H”. The copy is printed on the printer designated for it.
NOTE:
See “Changing the Display Printer” later in this
chapter.
13-4
rem mwas eae ee eee lO
Am mh Ef
[Al
About Printers
The /// E-Z Pieces program contains information about certain printers,
and you know about your own printer situation. In order to print with / // E-Z
Pieces, you must communicate to ///E-Z Pieces what you know about
your printer so/// E-Z Pieces can link up your information with the informa-
tion it has. /// E-Z Pieces allows you to have up to three printers on your
own list of printers.
identify your printer situation according to the following four possible
situations:
1. You have an Apple Dot Matrix Printer (DMP) and no other printer.
The Apple DMP is ///E-Z Pieces’ “default printer”, which is the
printer /// E-Z Pieces thinks you'll use. If you have an Apple DMP
and no other, you need read no further in this section. You're set to
print.
2. You don’t have an Apple DMP but you have another printer on
///€E-Z Pieces’ list:
— Apple Imagewriter
— Apple Daisy Wheel Printer
— Apple Silentype
— Epson MX Series
— Epson MX/Graftrax Series
— Epson RX Series
— Epson FX Series
— Qume Sprint 5
— Qume Sprint 11
If you don’t have an Apple DMP but you have one of these other printers, you
must remove the Apple DMP as///E-Z Pieces’ default printer and add the
printer you have. You also specify your printer as the one’ where screen
contents should print. See
— “Adding a Printer”
— “Removing a Printer”
— “Changing the Display Printer”
3. If you have an Apple DMP and one of the other printers on the list,
you must tell /// E-Z Pieces about the other printer and make sure
the printer specified for printing screen contents is the correct one.
— “Adding a Printer”
— “Changing the Display Printer”
13-5
4.
lf you printer isn’t on /// E-Z Pieces’ list, you can still use it for
///€-Z Pieces reports by using the custom printer option from
///€-Z Pieces’ list. See
“Adding a Printer”
— “Changing the Display Printer”
NOTE:
The “default printer” is the printer where / / / E-Z
Pieces thinks you'll print.
Specifying Information About Your Printer
When you specify information about your printer, you
Add a printer to the list of printers you’re using
Remove a printer from the list
Change specifications about a printer
Change the display printer
This section tells how.
Adding a Printer
You can add printers to the list of printers you're using until // / E-Z Pieces
knows about three of your printers. To add a printer:
iP
2
a
4
Choose “Other Activities” from the list of Main Menu options.
. Choose “Specify information about your printer(s)”.
Choose “Add a printer (maximum of 3)”.
. Choose the type of printer you are adding. If you are setting up a
printer to assign to disk, choose the printer you will ultimately use
when you print your report.
. Type a name for your printer. The name can contain 15 or fewer
characters, and it can be any name you choose. Press “RETURN”
after you type the printer’s name.
. Choose the device driver for your printer.
NOTE:
See your Apple/// Owner’s Manual and Appen-
dix A of this manual for more information about
device drivers.
13-6
ee
, a ) 3 |
Ww
a’ mWHWuWwWh HHH HM
™ m7
em rm
ai Lt
[Ai lal
Specification
7. If necessary, change specifications listed in Table 13-1. (If you don't
change any specifications, your printer will print normally.) To
change one of the first three specifications, type the number of the
option and choose “Yes” by typing “Y” in response to “Change the
value?”. ///E-Z Pieces automatically changes the value to its
opposite.
To change specification 4, type “4”. Then type the new value for
platen width. Then press “RETURN”.
To change specification 5 (for Custom Printer only), type “5”. Then
select which printer characteristic you wish to describe to /// E-Z
Pieces. After selecting the specific characteristic from the menu, you
will enter the control characters exactly as they must be sent to your
printer. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for your printer for a table of
control characters. To terminate entering the control character
sequence, enter a caret (“"”).
You may now define another printout feature to /// E-Z Pieces or
return to the specification selection menu by pressing “ESCAPE”,
NOTE:
For more information on the characteristics of
your printer that you will want to define to
///€-Z Pieces, see the sections on “Controlling
Horizontal Spacing”, “Controlling Print Density”,
“Controlling Vertical Spacing”, and “Using Spe-
cial Printing Techniques” in Chapter 8 of this
manual.
Explanation
“1. Needs line feed after
each RETURN” Some printers automati-
cally generate a linefeed
after every carriage return;
these printers do not need
a linefeed from the pro-
gram. Other printers
require that the program
generate the linefeed. If
your printer isn’t spacing
after each line, or if it is
double spacing when it
shouldn't, try changing this
value.
13-7
“2. Accepts top-of-page
commands’.
“3. Stop at the end of a
page”.
“4, Platen width”.
Top-of-page commands
are “form feed” commands.
After a page of a report has
been printed, /// E-Z
Pieces needs to instruct
your printer to go to the
top of the next page. Some
printers can accept a spe-
cial instruction called a
top-of-page or form feed
command that automati-
cally causes this to
happen. Other printers,
including the Apple Silen-
type, do not have this cap-
ability and must print a
number of blank lines to
get to the next page.
If you are printing on let-
terhead stationery or if you
have a printer like the Sil-
entype that uses non-
perforated paper, you will
want printing to stop at the
end of each page so you
can change paper or tear
off the printed sheet.
The distance your printer's
printhead travels, from left to
right. The platen width you
specify here must be as wide
or wider than the one you
specify for individual
///€-Z Pieces reports.
13-8
mr Pm ooo oo om omew
i ee oe | |
wii Wuiukwmuikh tt Uw
ibm
Va
Ln
“5. Printer Codes”
(Custom Printer Only) These are the control char-
acters that define to your
printer the meaning of
printing characteristics
such as print density,
horizontal spacing, vertical
spacing, and special print-
ing techniques such as
boldface, underlining,
superscripts, and sub-
scripts. The exact control
characters for these char-
acteristics may usually be
found in the operator's
manual for your printer.
Table 13-1.
Specifications About Printers
8. To return to the Printer Information display, press “ESCAPE”.
Removing a Printer
To remove a printer from the list of printers you are using:
1. Choose “Other Activities” from the list of Main Menu options.
2. Choose “Specify information about your printer(s)”.
3. Choose “Remove a printer”.
4. Choose the printer you are removing.
The printer is automatically removed and you return to the Printer Informa-
tion display.
Changing Printer Specifications
To change specifications about your printer:
1. Choose “Other Activities” from the list of Main Menu options.
2. Choose “Specify information about your printer(s)”.
3. Choose the printer you want to change specifications for.
13-9
4. Change the specifications: To change 1, 2, or 3, type the number of
the specification and then choose “Yes”. To change 4, type “4” and
press “RETURN”. Type the new value and press “RETURN”.
5. To return to the Printer Information display, press “ESCAPE”.
Changing the Display Printer
To change the printer where the display prints:
1. Choose “Other Activities” from the list of Main Menu options.
2. Choose “Specify information about your printer(s)”.
3. Type “1” and press “RETURN”.
4. Choose the printer where you want to print the display. You return to
the Printer Information display.
Printing
This section contains information you need to print Data Base reports, Word
Processor documents, and Spreadsheet reports.
Printing Data Base Reports
After you have formatted a Data Base report and set its printer options, you
can print it. To print the Data Base report:
1. Make sure you are at the Report Format display.
2. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-"P”.
3. Choose the device where you want to print the report.
4. If your report has a header, / / / E-Z Pieces asks you either to type a
new report date and press “RETURN”, or to accept the default report
date by pressing “RETURN”. The default report is the last date you
typed for printing a report.
5. If you chose a printer, / / / E-Z Pieces asks the number of copies you
want. Type the number and press “RETURN”.
13-10
™ mm Pe heh Sh mM Mm om
es ee eee ee eee eee ee eee
nau WWmiWkhueumuute «UU
oor Fel
AA mh ef
(Al
La
6. If you indicate you want to print to a text (ASCII) file or a DIF file, or
you choose the printer that you have assigned to print to a disk,
///€-Z Pieces asks you for the pathname for the file you are print-
ing. Type the pathname and press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed in this manual in
Chapter 1 and in detail in the Apple /// Owner’s
Manual.
During printing, you can press “ESCAPE” to stop printing and return to
Review/Add/Change. Or you can press SPACE once to stop printing and
once again to restart it.
Printing Word Processor Documents
This section tells how to printa Word Processor document. It also discusses
special printer options that cause the printer to pause during printing.
Requesting Printing
To request printing:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”’-"P”.
2. Choose “Beginning” if you want to print the document from the
beginning, “This page” if you want to print from the beginning of the
page the cursor is on, or “Cursor position” if you want to print from
the cursor position.
3. Choose the printer you want to use.
During printing, you can press “ESCAPE” to stop printing and return to
Review/Add/Change. Or you can press SPACE once to stop printing and
once again to restart it.
///E-Z Pieces Tips
To print a segment of adocument, print from the
cursor position to a place you've marked with the
printer option Pause Here (PH). When the printer
pauses, press “ESCAPE”.
This is good for printing the name and address
segment of a letter onto an envelope.
13-11
Pausing After Each Page
lf you want to put in a new piece of paper for each page you print, cause the
printer to pause after printing each page:
1.
a
3.
4h,
Put the cursor at the place in the document where you want the
printer to start pausing for each new page. If you want to pause after
each page throughout the document, put the cursor at the beginning
of the document.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
Type “PE” and press “RETURN”.
Press “ESCAPE”.
Finish the document and then print it.
Pausing in a Specific Place
To ask for a pause in a specific place:
ee
2.
3.
4.
Put the cursor in the place in the document where you want the
printer to pause.
Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“O”.
Type “PH” and press “RETURN”.
Press “ESCAPE”
Finish the document and then print it.
Printing a Spreadsheet Report
After you have determined how much of the worksheet you are going to
print and set printer options for a Spreadsheet report, you can print it:
1,
2.
Make sure you are at the “Review/Add/Change” display.
If you're not printing the whole worksheet, put the cursor in a cell
that marks a corner of the area you are going to print.
. Press “"OPEN-APPLE"-"P”.
. Choose “All”, “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”. “All” refers to all
information, not all cells.
. If you chose “Rows”, “Columns”, or “Block”, move the cursor to
highlight the area you want to print. Then press “RETURN”.
13-12
[= re low
_ re)
(=e
. Check the width of your report to make sure it’s not too wide for your
’ ae
printer's “platen”. If it is, press “ESCAPE” and go back and replan
your report. Otherwise, choose the device where you want to print
the report.
. If youchosea printer, /// E-Z Pieces asks the number of copies you
want. Type the number and press “RETURN”.
. If your report has a header, // / E-Z Pieces asks you to either type a
new report date and press “RETURN”, or to accept the default report
date by pressing “RETURN”. The default report date is the last date
you typed for printing a report.
. If you indicate you want to print to a text (ASCII) file or a DIF file, or
you choose the printer that you have assigned to print to disk,
///€-Z Pieces asks you for the pathname for the file you are print-
ing. Type the pathname and press “RETURN”.
NOTE:
Pathnames are discussed in this manual in
Chapter 1 and in detail in the SOS User’s Manual.
During printing, you can press “ESCAPE” to stop printing and return to
Review/Add/Change. Or you can press SPACE once to stop printing and
then once again to restart it.
13-13
Ln
wu Wu HH HHH HH KKM MM Mw Mm ft
APPENDIX A
Using ///E-Z Pieces with a ProFile
///€-Z Pieces may generally be used in two ways with a ProFile fixed disk
storage device. You may either boot and operate the system using the
diskettes supplied with this manual (or preferably with copies of them that
you have made for your own backup use), and simply use the ProFile for
data storage; or your may install the /// E-Z Pieces program files on the
ProFile, and execute the system using a program switching system such as
the Quark Catalyst™, or the Habanet™ System. This chapter explains both of
these options.
Using the ProFile for /// E-Z Pieces Data Storage
There is no special procedure necessary to use a ProFile for storing /// E-Z
Pieces data files. The ProFile device driver is already included on the “Boot
Disk”, and to store/// E-Z Pieces files on the ProFile, refer to the discussion
in the section in Chapter 1 entitled “File Locations” and simply follow the
procedures for “Creating a New Subdirectory”, and “Saving Desktop Files
to Disk” in Chapter 2.
NOTE:
A device driver is a file contained on the “Boot
Disk” that is loaded into the computer’s memory
at startup time which defines the parameters of
external devices that are connected to your
Apple ///, and allows the system to communi-
cate information to these devices.
For more information on device drivers, and how
to install or change those you wish to use, see
your Apple /// Owner's Guide and the Standard
Device Drivers Manual, or ask your dealer for
assistance.
Also check your Apple /// Owner's Guide for
how to operate System Utilities, and make backup
copies of all the disks included with this manual.
Then store the originals in a safe place, in the
event your working copies are destroyed or
damaged.
Installing / / / E-Z Pieces on ProFile
This section explains how to install the / / / E-Z Pieces program files on the
ProFile for use with systems such as the Quark Catalyst or Habanet sys-
tems. For other program switching systems, consult the manual for that
system on how to install applications.
Using /// E-Z Pieces with Catalyst
To install /// E-Z Pieces for operation with Catalyst:
1. Use the Apple/// System Utilities to create a new subdirectory with
space for 25 files called “/PRO/THREE.EP” (if the root directory-of
your Profile is “/PRO”).
2. Select the Copy Files function of System Utilities and place the
///€E-Z Pieces Boot Disk into the built in drive.
3. Respond to the prompt for the files to copy:
“.d1/="
4. Enter the following for the prompt for where to copy the files:
“/PRO/THREE.EP/=”"
5. When the copy is complete, put the /// E-Z Pieces Program Disk
into the internal drive and enter the following to the prompt for files
to copy:
“.d1/="
6. Enter the following for the prompt for where to copy the files:
“/PRO/THREE.EP/=”"
7. If youneed the space, you may delete the following tow files from the
directory /PRO/THREE.EP:
SOS.KERNEL
SOS.DRIVER
Allofthe///E-Z Pieces program files necessary to operate under control of
Catalyst are now on the ProFile.
To operate the system with Catalyst, you now need to boot the system with
the Catalyst Boot Disk if you have not already done so. Then:
1. Select the “CATALYST EDIT” option from the main menu.
2. Select the “ADD PROGRAM” option and respond to the prompted
items as follows:
rm => = = = Ps Ee ES OTlUlUrhlUlUlULhlUlUlULE USO
—_—_—s - = —— =. —
i)
/
Am HHH KH A A A A UA
3.
4.
5.
— Display Name: “///E-Z Pieces”
— Interpreter Path: “/PRO/THREE.EP/SOS.INTERP”
— Character Set Path: “RETURN” (for DEFAULT)
— Screen: “RETURN” (for NORMAL)
— Keyboard Path: “RETURN” (for DEFAULT)
— Initial Prefix: “/PRO/THREE.EP”
— Max Files Allowed Open: “0”
— Program Path: Blank
Exit the Add Program option, and select option 7, “Update Interpre-
ter Load Address”, and follow the instructions.
Upon completion, follow the instructions to exit the Catalyst Editor.
From the main Catalyst menu, select the number that you assigned
to /// E-Z Pieces, and the program will begin executing normally.
Installing and Using /// E-Z Pieces with Habanet
To install / / / E-Z Pieces for use with the Habanet Program Selector system:
I
2.
Boot the system with the Habanet Boot Disk.
Using system utilities, copy all files on both the /// E-Z Pieces Boot
and Program Disks to the subdirectory:
“ PROFILE/HABANET/=”
. Return to the Habanet main menu, and select the Add Program
option.
. Respond to the prompts for the name of the program to be added.
. When prompted, insert the / / / E-Z Pieces Boot Disk into the builtin
drive, and press the space bar.
. When the system is finished, you may return to the main menu of
Habanet, and select /// E-Z Pieces for execution.
NOTE:
lf you need the space, you may delete the files:
SOS.INTERP
SOS.KERNEL
SOS.DRIVER
from the directory: “/PRO/HABANET”
A-3
More Information
For more information, consult the operators’ manuals for both the Quark
Catalyst and Habanet Systems concerning any problems or questions you
may have encountered.
Having installed ///€-Z Pieces on your ProFile, you will now be able to
enjoy the increased performance and convenience features that the ProFile
provides along with the Catalyst and Habanet Systems.
ew!
=e
[a
= =
, Vr 7
Twi ea | =e '-—| ~
2)
‘ys
- -—
— ae |
_—— ew ee SS -
;
aeeeaea ee ee ee
'
ro
APPENDIX B
Sending ///E-Z Pieces Files Over Phone Lines
It's easy to send /// E-Z Pieces files over the telephone lines or to another
computer directly using Apple Access /// or other telecommunications
program. This appendix tells how.
Three Types of Files
Three types of /// E-Z Pieces files can be sent. They are
1. ASCII files created by the Word Processor
2. /// E-Z Pieces files created by the Word Processor or the Data Base
3. DIF files created by the Spreadsheet or Data Base.
An Example
The following is an example of sending a/// E-Z Pieces file as a text (ASCII)
file. The file being sent is a Word Processor file, but first must be converted:
1. Press “OPEN-APPLE”-“P” from Review/Add/Change.
2. Tell ///E-Z Pieces where you want to print from.
3. At the Print Menu, choose “A text (ASCII) file on disk”.
4. Assign it a pathname
5. Using Access /// to send the file as you would any ASCIl file, using
the pathname assigned.
///€E-Z Pieces Files
You may, of course, send ///E-Z Pieces files over the phone lines.
However, the receiver must use /// E-Z Pieces in order to read your files.
DIF Files
You may also send DIF files. DIF files are a VisiCalc standard and the
Spreadsheet creates them. The procedure you follow is the same as that for
creating ASCII files from the Word Processor.
B-1
NOTE:
A telecommunications program should not care
what type of file you are sending. The receiver,
however, must know what type of file it is getting.
Error Checking
Some telecommunications programs offer error checking. Access ///, for
example, can use Christiansen protocols to check the validity of the files
transmitted. However, both ends must be synchronized, and use the same
protocols.
EE a a a a a [es
aoa eee ea eas
A
s
INDEX
A
AGIVIG PIOW (DER BESO) s iii ncas cae ine iseisiadaenseeceeswerrRees4 3-2
DOUG FIG TSDISR CEO OT oc cascaeceuie or: 01s avs sinebchwnihs ork oits. te hbo 9-2
Activity FiO (WOE POCRSSON). sscws 206 ccaw ose aah U Siero 0S HR Sas Te 6-2
Adding Fleas tO Re DOSKIOD: .cncs wesc nek cw nn Leob ene enw eewnees Map 2-8
Answering Questions by Typing Information .................00005- 2-6
Arranging Information in the Worksheet ...........ceeeeeeeeeees 10-52
PIGS, GOOG. ccmitimridicemenxehee menswear nah Mie deiAe WN aOKon 4-20
PATA TE FE ir eres icoue san encanta W Tarte NR EN ee RN CI ANG ae 2-18
Availabie Space (On the Desktop) asc csasicieen sie ses swe es oboe see wire 2-19
B
Backing Us Fue scx cs ess wpa sae ese ser Saree weusacs wredss bos <aees 1-8
Blanking Areas of the Worksheet.............ceccesceceeecevces 10-41
EI I canis nscale anise pbnktsnnmssnnicetanineticnalinn elaoctianieienie dacaitran deamiticmlban tit 8-19
Botton? Margin (WOE FYOCESEON) esccmccnceccam senences midis ware wee wae 8-13
Bullets (IndentNG) ccaces ween cee meRswae eM NS ERE ETS Hi HOS 8-14
C
Calculated Gategory, Creating: css cvs aeces ome saws sae eau He4 Bes 00 5 5-11
Calculating NOW VAliGe ss cis cea. ccecseakas Ges Sia Cad OS Lids TAS Ke 10-51
CA LEARNT Cer RRND) Bele Gir bh Gib ree cece ecrne eccgzesnremmreenrmomncece 10-35
enn ct sicaiinaiis sass eicenseinipsinciig ecssin tinigh Masia wnions weeadimnaneieione 10-35
CBN LAYOUTS oe:c-ccrexaeewe scenes OAse Oar NEE Ma REN COUR Ra 10-31
Changing the Current Disk Drive or Prefix .............ccceeeeeues 2-14
Changing the Namie of & Fil@s os cscs ces vcs cee ties eg cee Bas s 7-20, 10-54
Ghanhoing thé Record LAVOE wis .ces cos ies E5a4.00 50a ee Fee ER Kees 4-21
Cre Caed rare PRU LR hr or ere bs a Ene adie wc esene wae wan warmer 2-5
Ae aS cir aeruave neees ae een ae Karen ee wa ene 10-15
GONRANG WG <ancsasnswen nee cenene Rau wee REN CHO REN Cue wos HON 10-34
Communicating With:/:/:/ E-Z PIOCOS: 2:6 wise vies care sewer weaw cere vee vas 2-2
Copy Cells, Exactly (Spreadsheet) .......... cc cece eee cece eee 10-49
Copy Cells, Relative (Spreadsheet) ............. ce eee ee eee cence 10-50
Copying Information (Spreadsheet) ............ ce cee cece eeees 10-44
eT PRONG cn Fis eeeeeepate bas eewecas wee ome aos COeoes 4-17
Copying Text Withinia DOGUINGNE «ces cas 0:00 wain's ce Kaw cas eine Here's we 7-14
CYreaUnG 4 Eats BaS6 FlG a, crcccas cos was Kam nawnwes now ses ermseerens 4-2
Créatinig a NeW SUDGITOCIOIY: 6 scars cai c08 cas 05 Bails UNG S@S FER HES BON 2-16
Creating, From a DIF File (Data Base) ............ cece eee ee eens 4-5
Creating, From a Quick File (Data Base) .............cc cece ee ee eeee 4-6
Creating, From a Text (ASCII) File (Data Base) .................00.4- 4-4
Creating, From a Text (ASCII) File (Word Processor) .............4+: 7-5
Creating, From DIF Files (Spreadsheet) ..............0cc0eeeeaes 10-10
reating, From Scraten (Dale Base) sc siciccwos vewesndoxavare ORONO KS 4-3
Creating, From Seratch (Spreadsneet) icc iswsses vee vsneaseee ope sens 10-9
Creating, From Scratch (Word Processor) ...........cccececeveeeees 7-4
Creating, From VisiCalc Files (Spreadsheet) ..................00- 10-10
Cursor Movement, In Multiple- and Single-Record Layout .......... 4-14
Cursor Movement, In Multiple-Record Layout ...............0.008 4-14
Cursor Movement, In Single-Record Layout ..............cc cee eee 4-15
ERE hag enguntawe wenanwennedanteds axe dae 9G Gem owERee te ERIE EU EeBE Ee 2-6
Cut and Paste, Data Base Information ........... 0... ccc cece e eens 12-3
Cut and Paste, Spreadsheet Information ...............0ccceceeees 12-7
Cut and Paste, Word Processor Documents ............seseesecens 12-6
SON CG oo SSI svses hncerccncio steered Sil cosaialihtinllnsbeitnidhants inten nent benssadleccnatist’ 12-1
D
CRITIC. TETAS cite ence acer ivi cepa tenteneie te cadtcectcolticaisitth asain Secs idicanettia mst Aenea Mok 4-11
Deleting Certain ReCordsicsics cccces sesseireenne satewwrs bate 18u ewE KN 4-20
Deleting Files From thie DISK «sic cosesvewrs ews csawes oeegde ous eaws 2-16
DEGING INTGTINAUON os. isa cay SEH EW REG ERA STR SAE EK i es 2-7, 7-10
Dir eee IN sci. tic stis se UL Ad Recalled ceri serine ah liclleenath eines 4-15
Deleting Rows or Columns (Spreadsheet) .............. ccc eee eee 10-42
Deleting Word Processor Information... .......c.ccescsscvecvecces 7-10,
Dispiaying Certain ROCONMG..c0s wes eas cars neere yeeuT see eee 9-24, 4-18
DIO ENWiGSics ios crswsse seis ous us KON FES eETROS AVES ERE ETT RS 4-10
E
Editing Entries: (Spreadsheet) sisi escscn cee ces ceewees caw vae ee 10-18
Eating (NMTOMBAUGN 5.555.658.6255, Fe CRSA ENS TER ERA SSE TRESS COO 7-7
Bearer Th ted RN Shen ech cons lnis il annals mccain tenalbanastiab ienmacn 1-1
Ne al iticcessa Msaiesthnnnilttc besten Usinseinaatinhan scsi Msiihee Maiti eden citoa nestles igi tient 2-7
F
File Gaidelines: (Data. Base) is o:0s asc swe came wae eae ns ome wpe sreweemn 3-3
File Guidelines (Spreadsheet) os vccvisc cae cite swe wea ews BESTT BOOT ORS 9-3
File Guidelines (Word ProcesSOr) .......... cece cere eee ee eet eeeees 6-2
Pile GuiGelines: General 5 csc cos cea seu 66h. ces REE AWS SR ERS HRS TR FRR 1-6
Er AL CoN T OED cali etl lsinc ab cS lio sic a icc A ina cin ines ciratial 1-7
ELI ID she fit sieve vesicle setae se acter seal 1-4
SAG Sev E ROLE, EAR ING scsi ersten carte di niniete nl Rea em Rene 4-21
Files by Filename or Grouped by Pathname ..............00e eee eees 1-7
Finding a Gell or Specific Information iu vsecssovessaveeeawss eas 10-53
FIG ROCOMSs ocavsavecw ese Pas cheese 61s ee Sew ERS rR EERE KES 4-25
PHIGind 6 SOCONIG PAGO. «64.10% aes BRe OSs 4UES KS FC 585.2 88S 1S HRS 7-17
EEREI RAP TEAR CONOR IONTND in vnicishediSserstheb sci oceth nese tility lest nell 7-18
yA
ia |
—
mw A
|
Al
|
”
<>
|
= | |
es |
mee wm Omelet Oo
, H
5) on
a
ee
mom om
SI, TIN NI iieta iano Sra PhccendclesteanGih seo ctctie indttinconilieactithmenneatlining 7-15
EEN TRS RE recs nce eats stn aac a0 eras Miah oan I RaNecntaT 10-36
Formatting a SlQnk DISK. cessnmssswesne wre ewswn saavew vENEESS es 2-16
Formatting Options, other (Data Base)......... 0. cece eee cece nee 5-26
PONIES as cas eo dee CEN FON Tes Cawe TOS TRE HELE CAE ONS See ewe KON S 10-28
FiuGUORS, ATU OUC 555.5 5 65-054 Re ADR ADOSER Ace domes 10-24
Functions, By Selecting Alternatives ............ccececcneueceees 10-25
eR, | | ae eee 10-26
PU CUIONS, LOGTCRIGOIE sew assaacasaversana-era arane aise aonacaans stew GRR 10-27
Fornctons: On '@ LISt ssswcea testers cws pee Hey ew eR WwENew eet eee. 10-24
PINCTIONS: ON) B VAC secs ass ce. pan eeswanawae Cos ese ows BSR ER TONS 10-24
FUNCTIONS, WWIINGUL AIGUMGING s ccs ccs 5.055 4e0 40S ARE. CREESE SERS OSS 10-25
eee ae aia iaR A Bite dieeh tds sais italiniailaail ba ialiincsnctsblt acclaim aCiananctleineaala 10-22
G
SUITES TEC ak thd ise earn secs aioe ealtiniie encuhecedtialtsireatt-accitia ach deiaisir tacos 5-14
Groups of Information, specifying ........ aR a VR RS EE 0 SR ER OTE 8-23
H
RFianging Paragrapns ies vs6sss.rss very ees ows Hee wee eee Kee eS HES EER 8-14
Monzolital SHAG «.cowses soya ese vE ee RR es NSE SE ON SERS; 8-9
|
FE), RG WUE WAH Aided dG Sida hah WH decd ninco 8-14
PERM VIPER TET RLOIED sis on dtemecseiiRcanaiararohellbcmcecacbSlansdhaeene estonia ecnaimimesiaoetinie 7-6
Inserting Rows or Columns (Spreadsheet) ............0.0ee eee 10-43
inserting, Information: nite Entnes icccc sacs sais 000 view een eau meewen weruen 4-9
Inserting, Records Into'a. NeW Files<sis0% cae sowwee ees tes eeewsee caer 4-7
inserting, Records into-an Existing FilG: .eis0 ss% esa nes cee weetiweses oc 4-8
J
Justifying, Unjustifying, and Centering............. cece eee cece eee 8-16
L
SARIS pie RNAI scissile Ati lilies Deere tt sae seceibeb 10-15
SIN Pt PAE orice dncn: Slt tie secitceseincsstiliat isa canal sitenie sities ah 10-34
LE, Vi RNIN a cirbenicati tear erat cneata eimai taecilennin Gaede wees 10-19
Labeis-Styie HOpOr wis conn cee 0000-008 see Rew eee NW EN REN RE ws VOU ERS 5-15
Labels-Style Reports, Determining Spacing ..............eeeeeeees 5-27
LEVOUL MUO: ROCOTG accw ccs an 66x 6 54-505 996 BHR HOOK KCR ASS FA TRS 4-22
SPOUT, Satta PRED | icc 5, ism pnincce-witiva Se hen digas nw Aland ardaecte Neo aee 4-23
Left and Right Margin Options (Data Base).............cseeeeeeeee 5-22
Left and Right Margin Options (Spreadsheet)............000eeee eee 11-3
LOT Maiaili WVORG PrOGeSSON) isc oe 69 oink HEE i oreeece arenes 8-10
Line Spacinig: (Word PrGCOSEOR) os 60,6: osie:kne-giewp seiner wsmenpinccniewiaveces 8-13
Lings Fer laGre (VWF FIOCERBOR) ca o:0:0:eynse:ceierecoimrses anes waca nese econamrshaatlesn ete 8-13
Listing Files onthe: Gurront DISK. .0:..csisincnsc canner ersmwee awaens 2-15
M
Main Functions (Data Base) sci wsan cwses sar ses copie awe esos b58 ¥s 3-1
Maiti FUNCLIONS (SOPEGQSNOO!) «sis isur caves san eies ver eos acon neneass 9-1
Main FURGHIONS (WOrd. PIOCRSSON} 0:52 bis. cie 40 R45 See dd nea wieweses 6-1
tee acaceacior eonsieosane waar an pee aceeene men emai aie ean reins 2-8
Making a Word Processor DOCUMENE 6:0: .c:06:0s ces nuciwe sce sisvernesion 7-2
Making & WOrmSneet ou scuscqewiss ese nee wiwoare ce weneswenseuss 10-3
MATKGrS, FINGING occ saqenensess cenis cnwewemue pennies enews eos ase s 7-18
WERE, SATIN ¢ oan. ons nce. nas couse se o0e ws tie OES CORTESE RAST NESS 7-18
Moving Back and Forth Between Files ............sseseececeeeeers 2-18
Moving Columns or Rows Within a Worksheet.............00000. 10-43
MOVING FECOIGS oo: 504080 ser tn renew 4 809 8 RES CREM eee 4-18
Moving Text Within'a DOCUIMIONE o:0:0.<is:anan since v:00 views s cece siew ews 7-13
Moving the Cursor to the Other Window ...........0cc cece eens 10-40
Moving the Cursor Within a Document........... cc cece eee e een eeees 7-8
Moving the Cursor Within a Worksheet .........-... cece eee eees 10-30
Multiple:and Single Record Formats . oi... ccc ccesestceccevnes caves 4-6
N
NOW PEGG, SHECHVING sscscasc00 ees es Kees rar cus OO) UE HER ECO RHE 8-22
NDTIS FRIOE, acnans don neeaueeeeencarenn Ted BEN MO eee weWe's 8-24
PUDONG sis whese sch ceW ed EN iene ROEDER ERE TOE bite COREE SOD 10-20
O
Oper Apple Commands. «ces ss00c0 500) He eae ce Ue Ore OO ee Ra 2-3
Oier ACUVIY Meh OOlONS ..o052.009 #08 bos Weeden End cae Bes Bow ROEM 2-14
Other Formatting Options (Spreadsheet) ..........0. cee ee eee e renee 11-6
Pp
PEGS: WINES, PHANG 65. sc3ctekeacce tec canes we Hes ERO Kew ews’s 8-24
Pads NUMBETS, CAGIIATNG «9: cisie'sias nan caw ahs-see Rew Hem HOw He eames 8-22
PEOInG GNG PAGE NUMDGIS a.ccisis sins scence ceed HOS Kee HOH Rie Kelein'e 8-22
Paper Length (Word Processor) . oo. 00000 0.005.008 cles nee vee eee cowes 8-12
PaUusing Alter EaGn PAGS cccecccn ase cow new nee Keneeda Saw Ces KOR wa 13-12
Pausing Inia Speco PIsCe cn ccesies cou wes ew anne as oH Cad HON O08 13-12
Planning a New Data Base File es css cay iw cae wses doe eve cine ca Fem Hes 4-2
Planning a New Spreadsheet Worksheet ..........00ceeeeeeeeeenee 10-3
Planning a New Word Processor DOCUMENT ....... 0. cee cece eee enees 7-2
re
BN SS a a — Se @ Be
in) i) aka) sae
rey
y
f
|
;
j
|
;
Pat I. ss aed ik as AG Sed ee cdi ete SR ARG HA TH AT RES1 Res 8-9
POTIONS. ccs con aed wre Kw mae Ge MEG es FS Ma ED & eae Brus Het wa 10-21
Print Density (WOrG PIOCESSOL) ois cicis isis Ses Ses tee 545 808 5 Hee Hes Wer i 8-11
Printer Options (Data Base Reports) ..........scecesccecscescecens 5-21
Panter ODTGNS (SHTERGSICEY) os a. csess cies ties LAS HSS bod Ded eaasenre Gu > 11-2
Printaf CIBHONS CAGES PIOCASEGEY: cn cnn ven one sine sxe eiem-eonnaceme eum We 8-6
Panter Cerone, BOGt GUSSEES ccs cies ons ees WOR bo ee we CASE s' CoN ED 8-9
Printer Options, Changing (Word Processor) ............0ce seen eee 8-8
Printer Options, Zooming in (Word Processor)...........0esee ee eee 8-6
Printer Specitications, CHANGING ¢ cas sais eas bes 55% HER kes KOs. OWE doe 13-9
Printer, Changing the Display Printer ............... cece ee eceees 13-10
PR PR ha Sad Ss Ria GRA hes A Hes en we Oc i 13-6
Ql a a a ee ee 13-9
Printers, Specifying Information About Yours..............20000e8 13-6
POIMOTR i: cae ees teu esis ews ees Bes ER RETA TERE HEE TOE EO DEW SRE KEE 13-5
Printing: a: Copy ot the Dismay ss ias wan ssusaws 065 06s eek Cow eresesas 2-19
Pritt) Date BASS SOONG oc secs vss cas BN SFG OF KOH ESR Kas Hoe Kee 13-10
PHNTING SOMAGSNSSt REDOFS wis sis vie ccecegcastcmnsesa whe eer rece een exe 13-12
i it ea ct ane i in pc 13-4
NE IRE PES ica aceite sewn anees: Semen ingieseidadstamnadinalnininmainnbeeigen seaeiers 13-4
PHANG 10 CIEE ss oro wun escans ee sae Ban Ee Raw RT EEE Hes WER KEES 13-3
Printing tO Pte? acs cas cewcorg ass Won Hee Hee Hew KEE TSE BE6 HE4 SCS A 13-3
PONENG TOSSKOGN ess 05 Hsis Haw cake HOW As Mee Wes ETT DEES EMG he oe 13-4
Pring 10: TORU FASE) FUG? nas casa isteis 855 08 EN Kiace:e-ernm mvencesearmmm xe 13-3
Printing Word Processor Documents ............eeeeeeeeeeeeves 13-11
Printing, Hard Gopy Of Ife DISDIAY: «0.20: cc were crosman aes carers 13-4
PIGISCNOD saccnens cna oa O08 WE" Rew erEN eS MOT RES BEN ERENT ES 10-15, 10-34
Q
QU AS s E-Z- PIGS « wes 200 nen seg esse ons aya 403 OOS BITS eS RESUS 2-13
R
FUN) Gre KG PT SEES HE 8 hs de DR Se Rhee were 10-16
SR, pT RTAT A PUMNGAON,, Siler Kay, Site! eid es cnamsee serene are cena acarmneuenonen 4-24
REMOVING Pues FONT thG DGSRIOD «1-0 eon escnean ne sven amauuvece avers 2-12
Replacing All Occurences of Information ............cc cece eee ees 7-12
Replacing One or Several Occurences of Information .............. 7-11
DONC PONTING <6 acc vou scuevensspsoue ss ese es RERE TATE SAS AOR CRE TE 5-3
FIO E NIE 5crs 9-18 Key Kae COEUR DDR WEAKEN AERA ES Ah eA EAS 5-3
Report Names and Titles, Adding or Changing ............... 5-11, 5-20
SUPT RN a iat ire a inet aa ee ea pre puasgcwenpictitmiatgiaisi EncieteRte 5-2
Reporting, (Spreadsheet) Determining Information to Include ....... 11-1
Reporting, (Spreadsheet) Determining Width of the Report ......... 11-1
RODOTING, (SOMECSHOGD sii sesscamveawnscewsawrnwreeweseenvecets 11-1
Reporting, Arranging RECOMS «...0.02:5:0.0 cme wie wen eae saceseiele 5-10, 5-19
Reporting, Changing Column Width ............ cc cece eee cece eee ees 5-7
Reporting, Changing Record Selection Rules.................. 5-9, 5-19
Reporting, Deleting Categories or Spacing Lines..................- 5-17
Reporting, Deleting CATeGOriesS ici 000s ses c0ies de pew nines wane non ces 5-9
Reporting, Inserting Lines or CategorieS ...........ccecee cnc cecees 5-18
Reporting, Inserting Previously Deleted Categories ................. 5-9
Reporting, Left Justifying Categories ..........cccceccceccvevevees 5-18
REDOING, LOGKING Gt ROCORIG os. x6:c iin ss sinise cos wee Fees cea Hee RES 5-20
RESOTING, MOVING CAlEGONSS o:-+.ss00.ss bd areaw Sag Hess deine avin Hed ews 5-17
Reporting, Moving Me CUIBOR «co: s00 te bs 05% o9:9 wise Say vee ws 5-7, 5-17
Reporting, Printing Category Names on the Report ................ 5-20
Reporting, Right Justifying Categories .......... cc cece cee eeceeees 5-10
Reporting, Switching Category PoSitionS.......... cece cence cece 5-8
FSO ORIN WO PRORID Boece. ccocsinrweccoa 08 Od Com ROE HRA BN he OOS See 2-3
Restoring the Worksheet to One Window ............cceeee cena 10-41
RETURN, ivthe Word Processor ccsasws ass swe caw asiov ood vu GOwe we os 7-6
Right Margin (Word Process?) «vos vies ses tes Hes How ene 00% Kareena s 8-10
PIGS aso Ar R eee ERTS iG NESS SES FS BTEA IRE RES GOR HAS ew a dee eee Rees 2-7
S
eR we a ois wiaceeceapcarndeie mun meneiecumonsmincch visite deli, oneiecdicne dean aries 8-2
BRET IC) LICE TE CO UC iercncessce ear wien: emcees te Suaiar nn a aN ora 2-10
Saving the: Fils You're WOrKINGiON: ¢ cau cis cawscevim cewwe as aera ee 2-18
Selecting’ a Mend Ootion: ccs cox wens vow sow ewagmawewiween oe we ewan 8 2-3
Selecting an Answer to a Question ......... ccc ccc c cece eee eee eees 2-4
Selecting the Standard Location of the Data Disk .................. 2-17
SIN LING TAVOTE. FP LOGGEOOE) 6-2:éi:6.ssnereroes eens wemsemar 8-14
Spacing in Reports (Spreadsheet) ai ois score ccsiasrnrnes evenens oownweees 11-7
SHSEA) FERIOIGS,. sage sesiesan cow emeswrnes wr senonense ee ESeT ees 2-18
Special Printing TECHnIQUESS: cas cis wo ciowcacenesinn genes anes 8K aS 2-19
SOIT VHOTRSNOOS cine 05,904 9-50:8 409 643.5 OPER EALERTS NEED SS SARS 10-38
Splitting the Worksheet Into Two Windows..............e0es eee 10-39
Stangard ANC Uren LOCATIONS = 6 064-2e8d Wed icewee wen ws.waneonne 1-7
Sma Values (SOACSNSEL) siiisccriecerrecdcenewven son viene 10-11
CIC VOUIGS s iis £52 Hasa50 4 MOLES CMe DSR CERO oMswer eR ENEMIES 4-10
SignGerd Vaiss: CHANGING. isicaccvsecsesnewasaneryees Sas 6a Ke 10-17
Standard Values, Checking Those in Effect..............0e eee 10-16
SR TOP ANE, oa creacemcieewh eras Ray Tew EEE ethene OG Be 10-50
Sticky SPACOSwcws's weg arsye Se sss TES. a eb VW BES OK FOSS RH BOK i 8-21
Striking Over Existing INfOrmMation s-i:sais sais. 0ce were cee eee veiwis cw Bow we 7-7
SUDSIOUE <6 955 <.2h6.FE ER WTAE WED DETERS TRESS KGS RSBE we GOG 8 8-20
I ES 46 G Tic cmantindd Rad ies wn kD 8-20
SYTICHTONIZING INS TWO WINDOWS 9.0. c<:cesins cies cccceenaees Ram bieeiweee 10-40
~~ Fe
LL TS SS |
il
ay
4
T
-_
A AaB 4A A
pan
a
\
f
i
|
T
THE TANS bist o ar one sam cae wae Gon wen canssmere nan bandh PE GINN 5-5
Tables-Style Reports, Determining Spacing ...............eeee eens 5-27
Tabs: MOVING TiO GUISOF Wess ass wes 5 ey Weis HEM REO ORERED CLES SSS 7-19
Taps, Seung GRE CHSSNNG «enc ied Ges 655.5608 FS ES Sie enema aw 7-19
Top and Bottom Margin Options (Data Base)................0-0 00. 5-24
Top and Bottom Margin Options (Spreadsheet).................05. 11-4
TOD MarGIN (WOE PIOCESSON) ics cee eis cxsnmn dea tee wensaeecwinns 8-12
TOS; AUGING OF REMOVING cc conc nies nae cian enees eons eae eee eees ik 5-13
TYVOING GAG SGING ErRriSs sa cca 093d Hew G6. 95 006 ARR Bho mee 4-10
TYPING ANA Eqwing IALONTIALUON 4. sins £44 685 wie EE Mien 2-6, 7-5, 10-18
Typing Entries; (SPr@BRGSNGSE) sas owen 6a 056s wsmenmewraiew anew 10-18
Typing Information from the Keyboard, while printing .............. 8-25
U
LOTIMTUE «ay esas 45% Bis GES Siem 55 <-SAwie en eRRAeN eaNeen ase canes 8-19
USING Fage TIGSGers BNE FOCI. svc inicnesams.nomsenase.cea weeds 04 8-17
V
CO Be) | i ee ee 10-14
AREER WE ene cance mses egriarenerecar eae REE E UGS RRCATS CORES SSR Kae 10-32
VEICIGS, VVGTRSPIGRE sieiy.ciccaneaw a sie pee WR EG GBS EA eRe ben were 6 10-20
Vertical Spacing (Word Processor) ccs és a06 602k com noeacis s.cwewn on 8-12
ATES LOU VO 5555605 Se BASS deacon arenes noi Om Ea ORY 10-36
PIII) FOUN CMUITEINE tc ncecaesoueneierm cir on suecrerncenene wii ards WSS ¢ 7-9
W
Working With One of the Files on the Desktop ............-..ceuee. 2-10
WETOROAINING saa v0 sipmanimwetgmes wank MWK F6EKES EHR ERG Kame areca unio wre 7-5
Zz
OAS A BD OU Sinn 08 pare enh eA aes CRY eo weremnmancce ern aware 4-21
NOTES:
a) n/n) n/n) i) (rn (a (n(n (n(n (ff
ay 6A LLL La a a a a a a aa
NOTES:
sue = (=a (=. ‘= on : : a is i ‘= * :
/// €-L Pieces
gas «.
SAMPLE FILES ze
to the |
By ho
© 1983 HABA SYSTEMS, INC. 15154 STAGG ST., VAN NUYS, CA 91405 sea
you!
| the lice
ment f
the fro
user S
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11